TireScan Manual

02/21/06 TireScan™ User Manual – Rev H

TireScan™ User Manual

Tire pressure measurement system

TireScan™ User Manual v. 6.0x

Tire pressure measurement system

Tekscan, Inc. 307 West First Street , South Boston, MA 02127 Tel : 617.464.4500/800.248.3669 fax: 617.464.4266

Email: market [email protected] web: www.tekscan.com

mailto:[email protected]�

http://www.tekscan.com/�

04/02/09 TireScan User Manual (Rev K) i

Table of Contents WELCOME TO TIRESCAN ...................................................................................................... 7

ISO .................................................................................................................................................... 7 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ....................................................................................................................... 8 WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................................................................................. 9 GETTING ASSISTANCE ................................................................................................................................ 11 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 13 NEW GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) ........................................................................................................... 15

Tab Bar ............................................................................................................................................................ 16 Toolbars ........................................................................................................................................................... 17 Showing/Hiding Icons on the Toolbar ..................................................................................................................... 18 Icon Display within Menus ................................................................................................................................... 19

QUICK START ................................................................................................................. 20

QUICK START PROCESS .............................................................................................................................. 20

HARDWARE & INSTALLATION .............................................................................................. 29

TEKSCAN COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................... 29 VERSATEK SCANNING ELECTRONICS ................................................................................................................. 30

VersaTek TireScan Configurations ......................................................................................................................... 31 Standard TireScan Systems (with VersaTek Handles) ................................................................................................ 31 Ruggedized TireScan Systems (with Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosures and Sensor Mounting Platform) ......... 32

VersaTek Component Identification ....................................................................................................................... 33 VersaTek Component Descriptions ......................................................................................................................... 36

VersaTek 8-Port Hub ....................................................................................................................................... 36 VersaTek Handle ............................................................................................................................................ 37 Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosure ............................................................................................... 39 Sensor Mounting Platform ................................................................................................................................. 39 Leading and Trailing Drive Plates ......................................................................................................................... 39 VersaTek Hub Power Supply (VPS-2) with US AC Cord ............................................................................................... 39 15 ft. USB Cable .............................................................................................................................................. 40 Software CD with sensor map ............................................................................................................................. 40 TireScan sensor .............................................................................................................................................. 40 Polyester Sensor Cover ..................................................................................................................................... 40 PB100B or PB100G Equilibration/Calibration Device ................................................................................................ 40 System Carrying Case ....................................................................................................................................... 41 Sensor Carrying Case ....................................................................................................................................... 41 System Manual ............................................................................................................................................... 41

Cross-Handle Scanning ....................................................................................................................................... 41 VersaTek Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 43 VersaTek Hardware Installation............................................................................................................................. 44

System Assembly ............................................................................................................................................. 44 Starting the software ........................................................................................................................................ 45 VersaTek Maintenance and Care .......................................................................................................................... 46

VersaTek 8-Port Hub Synch and Trigger Ports ........................................................................................................... 46 VersaTek 8-Port Hub Trigger Port ........................................................................................................................ 46 VersaTek 8-Port Hub Synch Port ......................................................................................................................... 46

Ruggedized TireScan System (Optional) .................................................................................................................. 47 Ruggedized TireScan System Assembly .................................................................................................................. 48

DUAL SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................ 53 Component Identification.................................................................................................................................... 53 PC Interface Board (SR-2) .................................................................................................................................... 54

04/02/09 TireScan User Manual (Rev K) ii

Dual Handles .................................................................................................................................................... 54 Dual System Hardware Installation ........................................................................................................................ 55

SENSORS ............................................................................................................................................. 57 SCAN RATE ........................................................................................................................................... 57

SOFTWARE .................................................................................................................... 58

MAIN WINDOW ...................................................................................................................................... 58 TITLE BARS .......................................................................................................................................... 58 MENU BAR ........................................................................................................................................... 59 TOOLBARS ........................................................................................................................................... 59 TAB BAR ............................................................................................................................................. 62 MAIN STATUS BAR ................................................................................................................................... 63 REAL-TIME WINDOW ................................................................................................................................ 63 MOVIE WINDOW..................................................................................................................................... 64 GRAPH WINDOW .................................................................................................................................... 65 LEGEND .............................................................................................................................................. 65 MAP FILES ........................................................................................................................................... 66 MULTI-HANDLE MAP FILE FEATURE ................................................................................................................. 66 TIRESCAN FILE EXTENSIONS ......................................................................................................................... 67 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS .............................................................................................................................. 67 THE MAIN MENU .................................................................................................................................... 68

File Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 68 Edit Menu ......................................................................................................................................................... 69 View Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 70 Options Menu .................................................................................................................................................... 76 Movie Menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 79 Analysis Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 80 Tools Menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 81 Window Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 83 Help Menu ........................................................................................................................................................ 83

CALIBRATION AND EQUILIBRATION ....................................................................................... 85

SENSOR PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS .......................................................................................................... 85 Practical Sensor Loading Considerations ................................................................................................................. 85 Conditioning Sensors .......................................................................................................................................... 85 Repeatability ..................................................................................................................................................... 87 Linearity .......................................................................................................................................................... 87 Uniformity ....................................................................................................................................................... 87 Hysteresis ......................................................................................................................................................... 87 Drift ................................................................................................................................................................ 87 Temperature Sensitivity ....................................................................................................................................... 88 Sensor Life / Durability ........................................................................................................................................ 88 Shimming Sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 88 Saturation ........................................................................................................................................................ 88 Material Compliance ........................................................................................................................................... 90 Cleaning the Sensor ............................................................................................................................................ 90

LOAD APPLICATION GUIDELINES ..................................................................................................................... 90 Method of Loading During Calibration and Equilibration............................................................................................ 91 Uniform Pressure Loading .................................................................................................................................... 91 Non-Uniform Applied Force Loading ....................................................................................................................... 92 Reducing Random Noise ...................................................................................................................................... 92

EQUILIBRATION ...................................................................................................................................... 93 Switchable Equilibration ..................................................................................................................................... 93 Multi-Tile Equilibration ....................................................................................................................................... 96

04/02/09 TireScan User Manual (Rev K) iii

Viewing the Equilibration Process .......................................................................................................................... 96 Comparing Equilibrated and Non-Equilibrated Data .................................................................................................. 98 UnEquilibrating ................................................................................................................................................. 98 Loading/Saving Equilibration Files ......................................................................................................................... 99

CALIBRATION ...................................................................................................................................... 101 Calibrating the TireScan Sensor........................................................................................................................... 101 Tare .............................................................................................................................................................. 105 Linear Calibration ............................................................................................................................................ 107 2-Point Power Law Calibration ........................................................................................................................... 110 Multi-Tile Calibration ....................................................................................................................................... 112 UnCalibrating ................................................................................................................................................. 113 Loading/Saving Calibration Files ......................................................................................................................... 113

TAKING A RECORDING/SNAPSHOT ....................................................................................... 115

ABOUT DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS.......................................................................................................... 115 SETTING THE RECORDING (DATA ACQUISITION) PARAMETERS ................................................................................... 116

More about Data Acquisition Parameters ............................................................................................................. 116 NOISE REDUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 117 TRIGGERING A RECORDING ........................................................................................................................ 117 GROUP RECORDINGS .............................................................................................................................. 122 PRE-TRIGGERING .................................................................................................................................. 122 TAKING A RECORDING ............................................................................................................................. 123 APPEND MODE .................................................................................................................................... 125 INCLUDING COMMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 126 REVIEWING A MOVIE .............................................................................................................................. 127 LINKING A PHOTO TO A MOVIE FRAME ............................................................................................................ 128

ANALYZING PRESSURE DATA ............................................................................................. 133

DISPLAY OPTIONS ................................................................................................................................. 133 COPY OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 139 OBJECTS ........................................................................................................................................... 142 MOVING AND SIZING OBJECTS ..................................................................................................................... 147

Method 1 - Direct Selection................................................................................................................................. 147 Method 2 - Numerical Placement ......................................................................................................................... 148 Method 3 - Objects Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................. 149

CHANGING OBJECT DISPLAY DATA ................................................................................................................. 150 GRAPHING OBJECT DATA .......................................................................................................................... 153 UNDERSTANDING THE GRAPH DATA: ............................................................................................................... 155 CHANGING GRAPH DISPLAY OPTIONS .............................................................................................................. 156 SAVING/LOADING OBJECT FILES ................................................................................................................... 161 SAVING ASCII DATA ............................................................................................................................... 163 SAVING AN ASCII FILE FOR AN OBJECT ............................................................................................................ 166 READING ASCII DATA ............................................................................................................................. 168

COPY & EXPORT OPTIONS ................................................................................................ 169

COPY OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................... 169 EXPORT OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................. 171 SAVING AN AVI (FILE MENU - OPTIONAL) ........................................................................................................ 173

EDITING ..................................................................................................................... 176

REAL-TIME EDITING ............................................................................................................................... 176 MOVIE EDITING ................................................................................................................................... 182

04/02/09 TireScan User Manual (Rev K) iv

SAVING/LOADING EDIT FILES ...................................................................................................................... 185 CUT FRAMES ....................................................................................................................................... 186

PRINTING ................................................................................................................... 191

PRINTING GRAYSCALE ............................................................................................................................. 193

TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................................................... 195

TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE ........................................................................................................................ 195

TIRESCAN SENSORS & SENSOR MAPS ................................................................................... 199

AVAILABLE SENSORS ............................................................................................................................... 199 Maps for Large Sensing Areas (Virtual Sensor Maps) ................................................................................................. 199 Sensor Map Layouts .......................................................................................................................................... 201

MAP 5026 ................................................................................................................................................... 201 MAP 7100 ................................................................................................................................................... 202 MAP 7101 ................................................................................................................................................... 203 MAP 7501 ................................................................................................................................................... 204 MAP 8000 ................................................................................................................................................... 205 MAP 8050 ................................................................................................................................................... 206 MAP 8100 ................................................................................................................................................... 207 MAP 8110 ................................................................................................................................................... 208 MAP 8150 ................................................................................................................................................... 209 MAP 8155 ................................................................................................................................................... 210 MAP 8400 ................................................................................................................................................... 211 Map 8405 ................................................................................................................................................... 212

Virtual Sensor Map Layouts ................................................................................................................................ 213 MAP 7100D ................................................................................................................................................. 213 MAP 7100D-2 .............................................................................................................................................. 214 MAP 7100D-3 .............................................................................................................................................. 215 MAP 7100D-4 .............................................................................................................................................. 216 MAP 7100Q ................................................................................................................................................. 217 MAP 7100Q-3 .............................................................................................................................................. 218 MAP 7100Q-4 .............................................................................................................................................. 219 Map 7100QL................................................................................................................................................ 220 Map 7101D ................................................................................................................................................. 221 Map 7101D-2 .............................................................................................................................................. 222 Map 7101D-3 .............................................................................................................................................. 223 Map 7101D-4 .............................................................................................................................................. 224 Map 7101Q ................................................................................................................................................. 225 Map 7101Q-3 .............................................................................................................................................. 226 Map 7101Q-4 .............................................................................................................................................. 227 Map 7101Q-5 .............................................................................................................................................. 228 Map 7101QL................................................................................................................................................ 229 Map 7101TL ................................................................................................................................................ 230 MAP 8000D ................................................................................................................................................. 231 MAP 8000D-2 .............................................................................................................................................. 232 MAP 8000Q ................................................................................................................................................. 233 MAP 8000QL ............................................................................................................................................... 234 MAP 8050Q ................................................................................................................................................. 235 MAP 8050Q-2 .............................................................................................................................................. 236

Diagnostic Map Layouts ..................................................................................................................................... 237 Map VM8400-A ............................................................................................................................................ 237 Map VM8400-B ............................................................................................................................................ 238 Map VM8400-C ............................................................................................................................................ 239 Map VM8400-D ............................................................................................................................................ 240

04/02/09 TireScan User Manual (Rev K) v

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................. 241

VIDEO SYNCHRONIZATION™ ADD-ON ........................................................................................................... 242 EXTERNAL TRIGGER SYNCH ADD-ON .............................................................................................................. 243 ADDITIONAL ADVANCED ANALYSIS ADD-ONS ...................................................................................................... 244 SYNCHRONIZATION PULSE ......................................................................................................................... 246

Enabling the External Synch Signal ...................................................................................................................... 246 AUTOMATIC SEQUENTIAL RECORDING ............................................................................................................. 249 TEKSCAN API 2 USAGE ............................................................................................................................ 251

1. Configure the Server ...................................................................................................................................... 251 2. Build a Client Software .................................................................................................................................. 252 3. Running the Client from a Separate Machine ...................................................................................................... 252 4. Configure the Microsoft Distributed COM Securities ............................................................................................. 252 5. API Definitions ............................................................................................................................................. 253 6. About the Sample Client Program ..................................................................................................................... 261

GLOSSARY ................................................................................................................... 265

04/02/09 TireScan User Manual (Rev K) 7

WELCOME TO TIRESCAN

ISO Tekscan is registered to the following standard(s):

• ISO 9001: 2000 • ISO 13485: 2003


DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY The Tekscan TireScan System has been tested and conforms to the following standards for a ‘Tactile Sensor System’: Europe EN55011, EN50082-1, IEC801-2, IEC801-3, IEC801-4, IEC801-5

TYPE BF EQUIPMENT

Type BF Equipment is type B equipment with an F type applied part. Type B equipment Equipment which provides a particular degree of protection against electric shock, particularly regarding the allowable leakage current and the reliability of the protective earth connection.

F-type isolated (floating) applied part An applied part isolated from all other parts of the equipment to such a degree that the patient leakage current allowable in a single fault condition is not exceeded when a voltage equal to 1.1 times the highest rated main voltage is applied between the applied part and the earth.

Warnings:

• The use of accessories and cables other than those specified by the manufacturer as replacement parts may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the equipment or system.

• Only use Tekscan supplied battery packs and power sources to avoid damaging the system. • Do not use or attach any components that are not explicitly stated within this manual. • Do not connect any additional multiple portable socket outlet(s) or extension cord(s) to the system. • EMC (Electro-Magnetic Charge) can interfere with the system. If this occurs, or if there is a high level of noise

on your display screen, try moving to a location that is not in proximity to other electrical devices (such as Televisions, radios, and cell phones).

• ESD (Electro-Static Discharge) can halt the system. If the system stops functioning, shut down the system by turning the power switches on all attached parts off. Also shut down the software. Then turn on the system and restart the software. If problem persists, make sure the humidity in the room is >30%. If you are still having difficulty in operating the system, contact your local Tekscan representative.

• Dispose of applied parts in accordance with Federal and State guidelines pertaining to computer equipment. • Sensor Replacement/Disposal: Dispose of sensors in any waste container. Sensors are not biohazardous waste. • Protection against electric shock: Internally powered equipment. • No user-serviceable parts. Do not try to service or take apart any Tekscan hardware. Consult with your Tekscan

representative if a component is not working correctly, or is not working as it should.


WARRANTY INFORMATION

Tekscan, Inc. Limited 1-Year Warranty

1. WARRANTY. Tekscan, Inc. warrants to the original purchaser of this product that should it prove defective by

reason of improper workmanship and/or materials:

A. Tekscan Systems and Components:

For one year from the date of original purchase at retail, Tekscan will repair or replace, at our option, any defective part without charge for the part or labor if an inspection proves the claim. Parts used for replacement may be used or rebuilt, and are warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period.

B. Tekscan Sensors:

Tekscan will replace any Tekscan Sensor which fails due to manufacturing defect if an inspection proves the claim. Claims must be made within 30 days of purchase.

2. TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE, call Tekscan at 1-800-248-3669, (617) 464-4500 in MA, for further

instructions. Should you be asked to deliver your product to Tekscan, Inc. in Boston, MA, shipping expenses are the purchaser’s responsibility. Proof of purchase is required when requesting warranty service.

3. THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER defects caused by modification, alteration, repair or service of the

enclosed product by anyone other then Tekscan or an authorized Tekscan service center, physical abuse to, misuse of, the product or operation thereof in a manner contrary to the accompanying instructions, or shipment of the product to Tekscan or an authorized Tekscan service center for service. This warranty also excludes all costs arising from installation, cleaning or adjustments of user controls. Consult the operating manual for information regarding user controls.

4. ANY EXPRESS WARRANTY NOT PROVIDED HEREIN, AND ANY REMEDY FOR BREACH OF CONTRACT WHICH,

BUT FOR THIS PROVISION MIGHT ARISE BY IMPLICATION OR OPERATION OF LAW, IS HEREBY EXCLUDED AND DISCLAIMED. THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES FOR THE MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO A TERM OF ONE YEAR. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THAT THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. THE BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT NO OTHER REPRESENTIONS WERE MADE TO HIM OR RELIED UPON BY HIM WITH RESPECT TO THE QUALITY AND FUNCTION OF THE GOODS SOLD HEREIN. NO PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION IS AUTHORIZED TO ASSUME FOR US ANY LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE OF THESE GOODS.

3. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES shall Tekscan, Inc. be liable to purchaser or any other person for any special or

consequential damages, whether arising out of breach of warranty, breach of contract, or otherwise. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so that the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

08/11/03 — FORM-200-057-B


GETTING ASSISTANCE Tekscan, Inc. will provide technical assistance for any difficulties you may experience using your TireScan system for 90 days from the system shipping date. After 90 days, Tekscan offers annual Technical Support and System Maintenance Plans or customer support at our standard rates per incident. An incident is defined as one single issue or problem. Contact Tekscan for additional TireScan sensors. Standard sensors are available in a variety of pressure ranges. Contact us for current pricing and availability. The flexible manufacturing process used to make sensors allows us to design custom sensors for applications in which standard sensors are not suitable. Custom pressure-sensitive materials can be formulated to produce a sensor whose sensitivity is well matched to a particular application. Contact your Tekscan representative to discuss custom sensors for your special applications. Write, call or fax us with any concerns or questions. Our knowledgeable support staff will be happy to help you. Comments and suggestions are always welcome.

Tekscan, Inc. 307 West First Street

South Boston, MA 02127-1309

Phone: (617) 464-4500 or (800) 248-3669 in U.S. and Canada Fax: (617) 464-4266

E-mail: [email protected]

Or visit our website at: www.tekscan.com

Copyright © 2007 by Tekscan, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Tekscan, Inc., 307 West First Street, South Boston, MA 02127-1309. Tekscan, Inc. makes no representation or warranties with respect to this manual. Further, Tekscan, Inc. reserves the right to make changes in the specifications of the product described within this manual at any time without notice and without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes. TireScan is a trademark of Tekscan, Inc. Microsoft Windows and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.


INTRODUCTION The Tekscan TireScan System is a complete package which converts an IBM-compatible PC into an advanced pressure distribution measurement system. Using patented Tekscan sensors in your normal operational environment, the system can sample pressure data as it happens (in real-time), present the information as a color-coded real-time display, and record the information (as a ‘movie’) for later review and analysis. The system is so versatile, you can copy pressure data and paste it into other applications, save it as a text (ASCII) file and import it into other programs, or print it out to any Windows-compatible color or grayscale printer. The system is so versatile, you can copy pressure data and paste it into other applications, save it as a text (ASCII) file and import it into other programs, or print it out to any Windows-compatible color or grayscale printer. The TireScan system is comprised of the Microsoft (MS) Windows-based TireScan software, the associated data acquisition hardware, and a sensor(s). Tekscan supports the following hardware configuration: a PC Interface Board (Super Receiver). Tekscan sensors use a resistive-based technology. The application of a pressure to an active sensor results in a change in the resistance of the sensing element in inverse proportion to the pressure applied. After a simple calibration is performed, this force can be displayed on the screen in the measurement units that you choose, such as PSI or mmHg. This document provides a thorough description of all of the system’s capabilities. Follow the ‘Quick Start’ section as a guide, and refer to specific sections for more detailed instructions on how to use each feature.


NEW GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE (GUI) The TireScan software has a new Graphical User Interface. The functionality of the software, as well as the location of the menu commands and toolbar icons have not changed. This is a purely cosmetic change to enhance the look and feel of our software. The few software differences are noted below.

Note: The documentat ion (both user manual and help f i le) may not yet be updated with this new Graphical User Interface. As a result , the images wi thin the documentat ion may not always

correspond to what you see on-screen. We are working toward updat ing all imagery and hope to have the new look integrated into our documentat ion soon.

The following displays the Main window with the New Graphical User Interface:


Tab Bar Directly under the Toolbars is a new Tab Bar. Each separate window (Real-Time, Movie, or Graph) has its own associated tab. When a window has focus (its Title bar is highlighted), the tab moves to the front of the tab stack and the tab’s font is boldened. You can make a window active (and give it focus) by clicking the Window’s Tab. In addition, each tab will have its own color. Note that the Farm Tread 7100.fsx movie is located at the top of the layer stack in the image above and below.

On the right side of the Tab Bar, there are three icons. The left and right arrows are used in situations where the tabs cannot fit in the width of space provided along the Tab Bar. If you have more tabs than can be accommodated along this Tab Bar, use the arrows to move the Tab Bar left or right and scroll through the tabs. The “x” icon is used to close the currently active movie (the movie that is highlighted and has focus).


Toolbars The upper (Main) Toolbar and lower (Advanced) Toolbar are still “docked” to the top side of the application window above the Tab Bar and below the Menu Bar by default. The Main and Advanced Toolbars can still be moved independently of each other. For example, if you want to have a single toolbar, grab the bottom toolbar by the dotted line on the left side. Note that the cursor turns into a four-way arrow (shown below left). Then move it to the right of the toolbar above (shown below right).

If, as in the image above left, you do not have enough space to display all the toolbar icons (due to the width of the application window being too narrow), a small drop-down arrow is displayed to the right side of the toolbar. Click this arrow and the remaining icons open on-screen (shown below). You can then select the icon of your choice.

To “undock” a Toolbar, move it away from the top side of the application window towards the center of the application window. The Toolbar will gain a Title Bar, and can then be moved around the screen by grabbing this Title Bar. You can also turn the single row Toolbar into a double-row Toolbar. To do this, hover your mouse over the left or right side of the Toolbar. When you see the cursor turn into a two-way arrow (shown below left), click and drag the side inward until it becomes two rows of icons (shown below right). To turn the Toolbar into a single row of icons again, reverse this process, pulling the side of the Toolbar outward until it becomes a single row.


To dock the Toolbar to a different side of the window, move it close to the side you want until the Toolbar “snaps” into place (shown below).

Note: The Menu Bar can also be moved, sized, docked, and undocked from the applicat ion in the same way as the Toolbars.

Showing/Hiding Icons on the Toolbar A new feature with the Toolbars is the ability to show/hide icons on the Toolbars. This gives you the freedom to tailor the Toolbar to your needs. If you never use an icon, you can simply hide it. If you always use a command or icon, you can keep it displayed. To show or hide an icon, click on the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Toolbar. Then hover and hold your mouse over the “Add or Remove Buttons” command. This opens the “Advanced” command. Slide your mouse over this command and all the icons located on the “Advanced” toolbar are displayed in a menu (shown below). By default, they are all checked (displayed). Click on any icon in the menu in order to hide it (remove it from the Toolbar). Repeat this process to remove any further icons. To add the icon back to the toolbar, go back into the Advanced menu of icons, and click the icon once again to check it. The icon is now displayed on the Toolbar.


Icon Display within Menus Icons are now displayed directly next to their text command under all menus.

Note: Not all menu commands have an associated icon. In this event , there wi ll be no icon displayed next to the menu command.


QUICK START This section is a quick look at how to use your TireScan system. This Quick Start procedure should be followed as a general outline; it will give you the basics on how to view sensor data in a real-time window, record this data, play the recording back, and analyze the data. However, it is strongly advised you read the entire manual before designing your application. Familiarity with MS Windows is assumed.

Note: This procedure assumes that the TireScan sof tware has been successfully installed on your system.

QUICK START PROCESS 1. Make sure the sensor(s) is inserted correctly into the handle(s). Click on the Start button at the

bottom left of the screen, select Programs, then double-click the TireScan icon to run the program.

2. The Select Sensor dialog box will appear. The currently available maps and handles will be displayed. Select

(highlight) the correct map number for your sensor under ‘Available maps’.

Under ‘Available handles’, a list of all handles currently attached to the system will be displayed. Select the correct handle(s) for the sensor you are using (a check mark will be placed next to your selection). The type of hardware configuration is listed next to the handle information. Your option is Super Receiver.

Note: Only one sensor map may be selected for each real- t ime window, but some maps require mult iple

handles. The number of handles required for the selected map is shown in the dialog box.


Once the sensor map and handle(s) have been selected once, the software will set them as defaults, and the dialog box will not be displayed at start-up. These options can later be changed in the Options pull-down menu, under Select Sensor.

3. Click OK. A new real-time window will appear (shown below).

The size of this window will vary, since MS Windows cascades new windows. If the window is too small to view comfortably, enlarge it by dragging an edge of the window with the cursor. The status bar at the bottom left of the real-time window should say ‘Sensor OK’. If it says ‘MISALIGNED!’ remove and reinsert the sensor into the handle.

Note: In order to get the largest display possible, the sof tware may rotate a window (90ο clockwise) that has a large aspect rat io. In this case, the origin (0,0) will be in the upper

right hand corner of the rotated window. If you get confused at any point , put the cursor over a sensel and look at the status

bar to get the coordinates.

4. Apply a load to the sensor. The forces on the sensor will be displayed in the real-time window as color-coded pressure information.

The TireScan system enables you to present the pressure data in many different display modes. Utilize one or more of the following View options to display the data as desired:

• 2-D (default) • 2-D contours (Optional) • 3-D contours • 3-D reverse • 3-D Wireframe

You may also select one of the following View options to help analyze the real-time data:

• Fixed Area Averaging • COF (Center of Force) • COF Trajectory • Peak • Averaging • Max Area Frame • Movie Contact Averaging • Movie Averaging • Background White

Note: Refer to the ‘Main Menu’ sect ion for detai led descript ions of each View opt ion.


5. Select Set Legend from the Options pull-down menu, and then select Raw. This will place a raw legend (pressure scale) in the Main Window for the Real-time window. The legend will show the pressure range that corresponds to each of the 13 possible colors on the screen. Before the sensor has been calibrated, the pressure readings in the window are relative, not absolute. Therefore, the pressure units displayed at the top of the legend will be Raw.

Click on the up or down arrows next to the top value of the pressure range on the Legend, if necessary, to adjust the colors displayed on the screen.

There should be a good variation of colors, with orange and red occasionally appearing in the display in only small areas. If too much red appears, the upper limit needs to be raised. If there is not enough variation in color, the upper limit should be lowered. Experiment to find the optimal settings.

6. Apply the actual test load to the sensor. Important! Follow all of the guidelines and warnings in the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section. Place the cursor over a loaded sensel (colored area) in the real-time window. Note that the cursor coordinates (‘Row, Col’) and the pressure at that point (‘Load’) are shown on the Main Status Bar. Verify that this point falls into the correct pressure range on the Legend (with the Legend's lower limit set to zero). The applied Force and contact Area are displayed in the Real-time Status Bar. The force is displayed as a Raw Sum until a calibration is done, and then it is displayed in the desired units.

7. Manually adjust the sensor handle sensi t i v i ty (adjustable gain). This is done by selecting Adjust Sensitivity from the Tools pull-down menu, then choosing one of the Low, Mid, or High settings (or default). The sensitivity adjusts the usable force range of the sensor. As an optional feature, you may also “fine tune” your sensitivity setting by entering actual values.

Note: Adjustable Gain is not avai lable wi th a PCI (Super Receiver) system.


Refer to the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section for more information on adjusting the sensitivity. The sensitivity adjustment is very important in ensuring that your data is accurate, and must be performed before the equilibration/calibration.

8. Set the desired measurement units, and the number of decimal places for force and pressure units.

Select Measurement Units from the "Options" pull-down menu (or click on the icon in the Toolbar), and then select the desired units of length, force, and pressure in the dialog box. You should select the units that you intend to use in the calibration of the sensor.

The ‘Measurement Unit’ dialog box may also be accessed from the ‘Calibration’ dialog box, or by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over the real-time window, then clicking Units. The selected units will then be saved when a new real-time window is opened or when a movie is saved.

9. Equilibrate the sensor. Equilibration is optional, but strongly recommended for the most accurate results.

Load the sensor (uniformly), then perform the equilibration procedure, as described in the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section. To access this option, select Equilibration from the Tools pull-down menu.


Once the equilibration is complete, the display will show any adjustments that were necessary for each sensel. If you make any mistakes, select UnEquilibrate from the Tools pull-down menu to remove the equilibration data.

Important ! Your data wi ll be inaccurate i f the sensor is not loaded properly during equi librat ion.

10. Calibrate the sensor. Load the sensor with the test weight, and then perform the calibration, as described in the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section. To access this option, select Calibration from the Tools pull-down menu, and then click on the Add button to add a new calibration point.

If you make any mistakes, select UnCalibrate from the Tools pull-down menu to remove the calibration data.

You can also choose to perform a calibration on a Movie window, after a recording has been taken, using the ‘Movie (Frame) Calibration’ feature. When a successful calibration is done, a calibrated Legend, with the selected pressure units, will appear on the screen, and the Force displayed in the real-time Status Bar will show the selected force units.

Important ! Your data wi ll be inaccurate i f the sensor is not loaded properly during calibrat ion.


11. Record a Movie or Snapshot. Select Record from the Movie pull-down menu (or select the corresponding icon from the Tool bar) to begin recording the real-time window data.

If you want to record only a single frame of data, select Snapshot from the Movie pull-down menu, or click its icon in the Tool bar. Once you have completed recording, you can select Append from the Movie menu to add additional frames of data to the end of the movie.

The sensor handle may also be used to start a recording. Pressing the long blue button on the top of the sensor handle does this. This function (known as ‘Remote Recording’) may not be used to stop a recording.

Note: Remote recording control is an opt ion in the TireScan system. It may not be avai lable on your system.

Refer to the ‘Taking a Recording’ section to learn how to change the recording (data acquisition) parameters, such as the number of frames to record and the duration of the recording, using the Options pull-down menu. The default recording consists of 100 frames.

Note: It is recommended that the sensor be Equi librated and/or Calibrated before an actual recording is made. They wi ll help to ensure that your recorded data is accurate.

12. Review the movie. Play back your recording by selecting Play Forward from the Movie pull-down menu, or by clicking on the Play Forward icon in the Tool bar. Select any of the other playback options in the Movie pull-down menu, or click on their icons, to play the movie forward or backward, move one frame forward or backward, move to the first or last frame, or stop the movie. You can also press the <SHIFT> key at the same time as Play Forward or Play Backward, to play the movie forward or backward in a continuous loop. These options are described in more detail in the ‘Taking a Recording’ section.

You may also select one of the following View options to help analyze the movie data:

• COF Trajectory • Peak/Phase • COF • Fixed Area Averaging • Max Area Frame • Movie Averaging • Averaging • Movie Contact Averaging

Note: Refer to the ‘View Menu’ sect ion for detai led descript ions of each of these View opt ions.


13. Save the movie. To save your movie as a file that can be opened later, select Save Movie from the File pull-down menu. When the ‘Save As’ dialog box is displayed, enter the desired file name (default is ‘Movie.fsx’) and destination (path) where you want to save your recording. Recordings are saved as TireScan Movie files (extension *.fsx). Movies can be opened at a later time by selecting Open Movie from the File pull-down menu.

14. Edit the movie. The TireScan software provides you with the tools necessary to remove or average cells (or groups of cells), or to remove specific movie frames, if desired. Refer to the ‘Editing a Movie’ section for more information.

15. Analyze (and graph) specific data in the movie. As an example, select Show Panes from the Analysis pull-down menu. When the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box appears, with ‘Create a new graph’ highlighted, click OK. A colored box is placed in the movie window, and ‘Graph 1’ is opened. This graph will contain a colored trace that represents the data inside the box. In this way, the box data can be studied separately from the rest of the window data.


The Objects and Properties options, in the Analysis pull-down menu, are used to change which data is displayed in each object and graph. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more information.

16. Copy the

pressure data from a Movie, Real-time, or Graph window, or a Legend.

Select Copy from the Edit pull-down menu (or click on the corresponding icon in the Tool bar), or click the right mouse button while the cursor is above a window (or the Legend), and select Copy.

The active window pressure data will be copied to the MS Windows clipboard as both text (ASCII) and a graphic (bitmap), and will be available to be pasted into other Windows applications.


If a box (‘Analysis’ menu item) is active, and Copy is selected, only the pressure data inside that box will be copied to the clipboard. Refer to the description of the Edit menu in the ‘Main Menu’ section for more details.

17. Print the active window. Select Print Setup from the File pull-down menu, select all your desired printing options, and then click <OK>.

Then select Print from the File pull-down menu, and click <OK>. TireScan gives you many printing options, including printing graphs on the same page as a movie or real-time window, and printing in grayscale.

Note: A Graph window can only be printed by select ing ‘Graph’ in the Print Setup opt ions.

You have now completed the Quick Start section. You should now be familiar with TireScan, and see how easy it is to view, save, and analyze the pressures on the sensor. The rest of the manual will give you detailed instructions on how to get accurate and meaningful data, and how to best use it for your specific application.


HARDWARE & INSTALLATION This section presents instructions for hardware installation, and also provides the system requirements necessary to support the TireScan pressure measurement system.

TEKSCAN COMPUTER REQUIREMENTS For your Tekscan system to function properly, your computer must meet or exceed the following requirements:

Suggested Minimum Computer Requirements (desktop or laptop) for all Tekscan Systems

• Intel Pentium 600 MHz or higher processor1

• 128 MB RAM (512 MB RAM recommended) • 1 GB hard drive • CD ROM drive

• Windows 2000 (SP4), XP (SP2),Vista, or 7 operating system (32-bit versions)2

Computer Interface Requirement (one of the following options, depending on your sytem:

• 1 USB port/handle for ELF or Evolution systems • 1 USB port for Mobile systems • 1 USB 2.0 port for VersaTek systems

Requirements for Video Package (in addition to the above requirements)

• 20 GB Hard drive (ATA-33, 7200 RPM speed) • Firewire (iLink or IEEE1394) port

• MiniDV (digital video) format camcorder with Firewire (iLink or IEEE1394) port3

1 HR Mat Walkway systems that require scan rates higher than 60 Hz. require a computer with a 2 GHz or higher dual core processor.

2 Evolution I-Scan and T-Scan systems are compatible with both 32- and 64-bit operating systems. ELF software is not yet supported with

the Windows 7 operating system.

3 Currently, MiniDV format is the only video format supported for capturing video directly using Tekscan software. Cameras that use other

formats are not compatible with our video capture and playback package. For video cameras not-using MiniDV formats, a third party software must be used to transfer video from the camera to the computer.


VERSATEK SCANNING ELECTRONICS The Industrial VersaTek Scanning Electronics is offered standard with TireScan systems. It is comprised of a new Industrial VersaTek Handle, which replaces Dual Handles that connect to a PCI board in the host computer. VersaTek Industrial Scanning Electronics introduces the concept of Cross-Handle Scanning (multiplexing among any number of VersaTek Handles). Cross-Handle Scanning greatly reduces the number of electronic connections or Handles required to address large arrays of sensels. In addition, Cross-Handle Scanning improves the scan rate of Sensors that require 3 or more Handles (refer to the Scan Rate section for further information). Finally, it enables previously unattainable configuration options (a 3-handle configuration, for example). Up to eight Handles can be used together (for example, the 8050 tire Sensor. Industrial VersaTek Handles can be used with both “T” and “CH-T” type Sensors. “T” type Sensors such as the 5101 or 5027 can be used individually or in Parallel. When used individually, one handle is connected to one sensor, and is mapped in the software. When used in parallel, eight individual sensors with eight different maps can be used simultaneously, for example. If eight to sixteen Handles are to be operated in parallel, two 8-port Hubs are used and the scanning is automatically synchronized. In addition, since the VersaTek Handles work with both "T" and "CH-T" type Sensors, multiple handle types are no longer necessary. For example, both tire footprint and tire bead measurements can be performed with VersaTek. Refer to the Appendix: TireScan Sensors & Sensor Maps section for a list of applicable sensors. The VersaTek Handles are connected to a 2- or 8-port VersaTek Hub, which is then connected to a USB 2.0 port on the computer. This eliminates the need for Magma boxes and PCI slots. With the introduction of VersaTek, two new tire sensors are now available:

• Sensor model 8400 replaces the current 8050. It has four Handle connections on the same side for easier use with larger tires on roll-over studies. The active area and resolution are the same.

• Sensor model 8405 has six Handle connections; all on the same side.

The following sections provide information on the VersaTek Scanning Electronics, and procedures for installation and setup.


VersaTek TireScan Configurations

Standard TireScan Systems (with VersaTek Handles)

The following image shows the TV8400 System:

TireScan System Components

TireScan 7101 TV7101

• (1) VersaTek 8-Port Hub • (2) VersaTek Handles • (1) Hub Power Supply (with US AC Cord) • (1) USB Cable • (1) TireScan Software CD with 7101 Map • (1) 7101 Sensor • (1) PB100B Equilibration Device • (1) System Carrying Case • (1) Sensor Carrying Case • (1) System Manual








Ruggedized TireScan Systems (with Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosures and Sensor Mounting Platform)

The following image shows the TVR8400 System:

TireScan 8400 Ruggedized

TVR8400

• (1) VersaTek 8-Port Hub • (2) Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosures • (1) Sensor MountingPlatform • (1) Leading Drive Plate • (1) Trailing Drive Plate • (1) Hub Power Supply (with US AC Cord) • (1) USB Cable • (1) TireScan Software CD with 8400 Map • (1) 8400 Sensor • (1) Polyester Sensor Cover • (1) PB100F Equilibration Device • (1) System Carrying Case • (1) Sensor Carrying Case • (1) System Manual • (1) Top and (1) Bottom Edge plate


TireScan 8405 Ruggedized

TVR8405

• (1) VersaTek 8-Port Hub • (3) Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosures • (1) Sensor Mounting Platform • (1) Leading Drive Plate • (1) Trailing Drive Plate • (1) Hub Power Supply (with US AC Cord) • (1) USB Cable • (1) TireScan Software CD with 8405 Map • (1) 8405 Sensor • (1) Polyester Sensor Cover • (1) System Carrying Case • (1) Sensor Carrying Case • (1) System Manual • (1) Top and (1) Bottom Edge plate

VersaTek Component Identification The following table provides a view of all the components that ship with your VersaTek Scanning Electronics (TV7101, TV8000, TV8400, and TV8405 configurations).

(1) VersaTek 8-Port Hub (Part #V8PH-1)

(2, 4, or 6) VersaTek Sensor Handles with attached CAT5E with RJ45

Connector Cable (number of handles will vary, depending upon

configuration)

(1) 15 ft. USB Cable

Note: Extending the Hub’s USB Cable is not recommended.

(1) 8 Port VersaTek Hub Power Supply (12V 60W Universal

VPS-2) with US AC Cord

Note: The 2-Port and 8-port VersaTek Hub power

supplies are not in terchangeable.

(1) User Manual

(1) TireScan Software CD with (1) map enabled


(1) System Carrying Case

(1) Sensor Carrying Case

(1) of the following TireScan Sensors:

7101 8000 8400 8405

(1) PB100B Equilibration / Calibration Device

VersaTek Handle CAT5E Cable Extension

Handle cable length can be extended up to 100 ft. with the following components:

• Shielded RJ45 modular coupler (per cable extension)

• (1 or more) Shielded CAT5E cable(s) (multiple cable extensions can be used, but total cable length should not exceed 100 ft.)

Note: Tekscan does not provide components for extending your VersaTek Handle cables.

Note: Ensure all Handles have an equal total cable length (i .e. Handle A and Handle B each have the same total cable length).

The following table provides a view of all the components that ship with your VersaTek Scanning Electronics (TVR8400, and TVR8405 configurations).

(1) VersaTek 8-Port Hub (Part #V8PH-1)

(2 or 3) Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosures with 2 attached CAT5E with RJ45

Connector Cables each (number of Enclosures will vary, depending

upon configuration)

(1) 15 ft. USB Cable


(1) 8 Port VersaTek Hub Power Supply (12V 60W Universal VPS-2)

with US AC Cord

(1) User Manual

(1) TireScan Software CD with (1) map enabled


(1) System Carrying Case

(1) of the following TireScan Sensors:

8400 8405

(1) PB100G Equilibration / Calibration Device

(1) Sensor Mounting Platform

(1) Polyester Sensor Cover

(1) Leading and (1) Trailing Drive Plates

(1) Top Edge and (1) Bottom Edge Plates



• Shielded RJ45 modular coupler (per cable extension)



Note: Ensure all Handles have an equal total cable length (i .e. Handle A and Handle B each have the same total cable

length).


VersaTek Component Descriptions The following outlines all the components that ship with your system and provide an explanation of their operation. Some components may not be included in your system, as configurations vary. Refer to the VersaTek TireScan Configurations section for information on standard TireScan configurations, and refer to the VersaTek Component Identification section to see a list of included components standard with these configurations.

VersaTek 8-Port Hub The VersaTek 8-port Hub acts as a gateway between the VersaTek Handle (and attached sensor) and the PC or laptop computer. It is powered by a standard AC adapter, which plugs into a wall outlet or power bar. On one end, the Handle cable is connected, which leads to the VersaTek Handle, and on the other end a single USB Cable leads to the PC or laptop computer.

Note: Users who want more portabi li ty can connect their own 9V DC supply to the Hub Power Port , capable of sourcing 700 milliamps through a Switchcraf t 760 sty le plug with center pin posi t ive.

One to eight VersaTek Handles can be connected to an eight port Hub. Depending on the system, VersaTek Handles can operate in parallel, for example, with eight individual sensors with eight different maps. If eight to sixteen Handles are to be operated in parallel, two Hubs are used and the scanning is automatically synchronized. Alternatively, up to eight Handles can be used together (cross-handle scanning). An example of this is the 8050 tire sensor.

The VersaTek Hub includes built-in support for Triggering (The trigger switch is an optional component) and Synchronization capability. Synchronization and trigger connectors are always present on the Hub, and a software option is required to enable external Trigger and Synch operation.

Note: To minimize noice, the VersaTek 8-port Hub should only be used with VersaTek Handles. VersaTek Cuf fs should not be used with the VersaTek 8-port Hub.

The following shows the VersaTek 8-port Hub (front v iew):

The image below displays the VersaTek 8-port Hub labels printed on the back of the

Hub.

Note: Please refer to the Declarat ion of Conformity sect ion for an explanat ion of

the symbols found on the label.


• Hub Power: A green LED indicates the Hub is receiving power and is turned on. If this LED is off, but the Hub is connected, this means either there is no power moving through the Hub, or it is not recognized by the operating system (Under the Device Manager in the “System” dialog – found under the Windows Control Panel).

• Hub Enumeration: A green LED indicates the Hub is communicating with the PC or laptop.

• Channel Ports: A green LED indicates the Handle is powered and connected to the Hub. A second orange communication LED indicates the Handle unit is communicating with the Hub. The flashing occurs at a frequency that reflects the current communication traffic. This light only flashes when the software is running.

VersaTek Handle The VersaTek Handle gathers the data from the sensor and processes it so that it can be sent easily to the computer. The handle may also be used to start or stop a recording. This function is referred to as "Remote Recording." The Handle's attached 15-foot (4.5 meter) cable is a shielded CAT5E Cable with RJ45 connector which attaches to one of the Hub’s Channel Ports. It is easy to get and adapter for longer cable lengths between the Handle and Hub. RJ45 adapter cables can be used to achieve 100 feet (30 meters) cable length with no degradation of performance. Communication between Handle & Hub is LVDS (low voltage differential signal). The VersaTek Hub is used to convert the communication protocol to USB (connected to the host computer). The Handle Cable can be extended up to 100 feet, if required for the application. If an extension is required, an RJ45 cable can be purchased along with an RJ45 coupler. Both the cable and the coupler must be shielded. Also, please bear in mind the longer the extension, the more the system may be subjected to ambient noise.


The VersaTek Handle has a latch on its topside. In the "Up" position, the latch retracts the contact pins inside the handle to allow insertion of the sensor tab. The sensor tab is placed into the sensor handle. The Handle’s attached USB cable is then connected directly to your computer via the USB port.

The following displays the but tons and their funct ionali ty for the VersaTek

Handle:

The following shows an image of the VersaTek Handle wi th at tached

shielded CAT5E with RJ45 Connector Cable:

The following displays a diagram of the label on the back of the VersaTek Handle:

Note: Please refer to the Declarat ion of Conformity sect ion for an explanat ion of the symbols found on the label.

• Sensor OK Green LED Indicator: A green light here indicates that the sensor is correctly inserted into the handle and a Real-time window can be opened.

• Record Mode Green LED Indicator: A green light here indicates that the sensor is recording pressure data and transferring that data to your computer.

• New Real-Time Window Button: This will open a new Real-time window in the software, so that you can begin recording pressure data.

• Record Start / Stop Button: Use this button to start a recording or stop a recording that is in progress. • Function Button (TBD): This button is yet to be determined. • Power On Green LED Indicator: A green light indicates that the handle is receiving power and is

communicating properly with the Hub.




• (1) Shielded RJ45 modular coupler (per cable extension)



Note: Ensure all Handles have an equal total cable length (i .e. Handle A and Handle B each have the same total cable length).

Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosure The Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosure is used to house the VersaTek electronics of 2 VersaTek Scanning Handles. These enclosures can withstand being run over by a truck, and are offered in two TireScan configurations (TVR8400 and TVR8405). The sensor and covering shim stock are clamped to the platform. Refer to the Ruggedized TireScan System (Optional) section for more information.

The membrane button functionality located on the top of the enclosures is the same functionality as shown on the VersaTek Handle above. Pressing any one of the membrane buttons from any of the Scanning electronics will automatically control operation of all electronics. This means that you can initiate a new Real-time window or new recording from any one of the Scanning membrane buttons.

Sensor Mounting Platform The Sensor Platform (shown at right) is a steel base plate on which the sensor sits. The Sensor Platform is an available component for two TireScan configurations (TVR8400 and TVR8405).

Leading and Trailing Drive Plates The Leading Drive Plate (shown at left) is connected on one end of the sensor and is tapered at the far end so that the vehicle can roll the tire onto the Sensor Platform. The Trailing Drive Plate is identical to (and interchangeable with) the Leading Drive Plate. This plate is connected to the opposite side of the sensor and is tapered on the far end so that the vehicle can roll the tire off the Sensor Platform. The Leading and Trailing Drive Plates are fastened to the Sensor Platform via 3 metal screws. They are available components for two TireScan configurations (TVR8400 and TVR8405).

VersaTek Hub Power Supply (VPS-2) with US AC Cord The AC adapter that ships with the VersaTek system is used to power the Hub (shown at left). The 8 Port Versatek Hub Power Supply is a 12V 60W Universal VPS-2 unit. The Power Supply ships with a US AC Cord to plug the supply into a wall outlet. IMPORTANT: The 2-Port and 8-port VersaTek Hub power supplies are not interchangeable.


15 ft. USB Cable The 15-ft. USB cable connects the Hub to the PC or laptop computer. This is a standard 2.0 USB cable (shown at right).


Software CD with sensor map TireScan software is a 32-bit application. For software compatibility, see the Hardware & Installation section (specifically the Computer Requirements section). The software CD includes the sensor map(s) purchased. The sensor map(s) included depend upon your application requirements.

TireScan sensor The sensor(s) included depend upon your application requirements. Refer to the Sensors section for further information.

Polyester Sensor Cover A thin protective sheet of Polyester is an available component for two TireScan configurations (TVR8400 and TVR8405). The cover is fastened via the same 3 screws that connect the Leading/Trailing Drive Plates to the Sensor Mounting Platform on either side of the sensor. The cover is situated between the Sensor Mounting Platform and the Drive Plates. The Polyester Sensor Cover is a consumable.

PB100B or PB100G Equilibration/Calibration Device The PB100B Equilibration/Calibration Device is used to Equilibrate and Calibrate the 7101, 8000, 8400, or 8405 sensor. The device is designed to be used on a table or a desktop surface. The PB100G Equilibration/Calibration Device is similar to the PB100B device. However, the PB100G is used to Equilibrate the 8400 or 8405 sensor while it is inside the TireScan Sensor Platform. Both the sensor and platform must be inserted as a single component into the device for the device to properly work.

Caut ion: insert both the sensor and the sensor plat form into the PB100G device. Insert ing the sensor wi thout the plat form can potent ially cause injury to the operator and damage to the device

and sensor.

Note: Both of these Equi libra t ion/Calibrat ion Devices are described in more detai l in the “Appendix: Equi librat ion / Calibrat ion Devices” in your sof tware Help Fi le. Please refer to that

sect ion for Setup and Usage instruct ions.


System Carrying Case The system carrying case is used to store the VersaTek Handle system components. This case can be used to transport the system from one location to another (shown at right).

Sensor Carrying Case The Sensor Carrying Case stores the TireScan sensor(s) when the sensors are not in use. It can also be used to transport the sensor from one location to another.

System Manual Each system ships with a full User Manual. It is strongly advised that you read the manual and any documentation that shipped with your system before operating any of the system components or taking any trials. In addition, a full Help File is included with all shipments which can be accessed from the Start Menu on your computer or from within the software under the "Help" menu.

Cross-Handle Scanning Cross-Handle Scanning (CHS) is multiplexing among any number of VersaTek handles. CHS greatly reduces the number of electronic connections or handles required to address large arrays of sensels. For example, with Cross-Handle scanning, four VersaTek Handles can now address the same number of sensing elements that previously required eight Dual Handles (we chose to call this feature “Cross-Handle Scanning” as opposed to “Multiplexing,” to avoid confusion with the row and column multiplexing that we do within all our handles and sensors). The benefit of Cross-Handle Scanning is outlined below:

• Less equipment (Handles) are required when scanning more than 9,152 sensels.

• For three or more handles, the advantage increases exponentially with the number of handles.

• Odd numbers of Handles can now be used in custom sensor designs. For example, you can use three VersaTek Handles on a Sensor where previously four Dual Handles (two Dual sets) would be required.

In a Dual Handle system, two Scanning Handles are connected together and communicate to each other when sensing. When another set of Dual Handles are connected, those handles talk to each other, but do not communicate with the previous two Scanning Handles. Since each set of Dual Handles in a system can scan up to 9,152 Sensels, an 8-handle Dual system can sense a maximum of 36,608 Sensels (4 x 9,152 = 36,608). With the introduction of VersaTek, all Handles can talk to each other. This means that with eight Handles you can scan four times as many sensels (82 x 2288 = 146,432) than with eight Dual Handles.


The following chart outlines the differences between Dual Handles and VersaTek Handles with Cross-Handle Scanning capability.

Number of Handles Sensing Area (Rows x Columns) Number of Sensels Dual VersaTek Dual VersaTek Dual VersaTek

N/A 1 N/A 44 x 52 N/A 2,288 1 Set (2 Handles) 2 88 x 104 88 x 104 9,152 9,152 N/A 3 N/A 132 x 156 N/A 20,592 2 Sets (4 Handles) 4 Two 88 x 104 176 x 208 18,304 36,608 N/A 5 N/A 220 x 260 N/A 57,200 3 Sets (6 Handles) 6 Three 88 x 104 264 x 312 27,456 82,368 N/A 7 N/A 308 x 364 N/A 112,112 4 Sets (8 Handles) 8 Four 88 x 104 352 x 416 36,608 146,432 As an example, we will compare the 8050 Sensor with Dual Handles to the 8400 Sensor with VersaTek Handles. With the 8050 Sensor, 4 Sets of Dual Handles (8 Handles in total) are required to scan the same area as the 8400 Sensor with 4 VersaTek Handles. The following illustration outlines this concept.

• Each set of Dual Handles addresses up to 88 x 104 rows and columns

• Up to 9,152 Sensels per Dual pair • Only two Handles communicate with each other • Map #8050 is four of these individual Sensors

• Up to 176 x 208 rows and columns • Up to 36,608 Sensels • All Handles communicate with each other


VersaTek Specifications The following table outlines the specifications for the VersaTek Scanning Electronics.

Mechanical

VersaTek USB Cable Length ft (mm) 10 (3048) Weight lbs (kgs) 0.40 (0.18) Connection Type USB 2.0 A-B Connections

VersaTek Handle Size LxWxH in (mm) 5.43 x 2.25 x 1.32 (137.9 x 57.2 x 33.5) Open Lever Height in (mm) 4.30 (109.2) Weight Oz (g) 5.5 (155) Weight (with attached Cable) Oz (g) 10.8 (305) LVDS Cable Length ft (mm) 15 (4572) 24 AWG CAT5E RJ45 Connection

VersaTek 8-Port Hub Size LxWxH in (mm) 7.63 x 4.79 x 1.38 (193.8 x 121.7 x 35.05) Weight Oz (g) 13.1 Oz (370 g)

VersaTek 8-Port Hub Power Supply Size LxWxH in (mm) 4.00 x 2.50 x 1.38 (101.6 x 63.5 x 45.7) Weight Oz (g) 13.6 (386) Power In 100-250VAC, 5A 50-60Hz Power Out 12VDC, 5A DC Cable Length ft (mm) 6 (1829) Hub Input Power Plug Switchcraft 760 Plug, center positive or equivalent AC Socket IEC320


Ambient Operating Conditions

Temperature: oF (o14 to 131 (-10 to 55) Prolonged use at high Temperatures should be avoided C)

Humidity: % 0 to 90 (non condensing) Pressure: psi (kPa) 1.7 to 14.7 (11.6 to 101.3) (sea level to 50,000 ft) Storage and Transport Conditions Temperature: oF (o -4 to 131 (-20 to 55) Short-Term. 41 to 104 (5 to 40) Long-Term. C) Humidity: % 0 to 90 (non condensing) Pressure: psi (kPa) 1.7 to 14.7 (11.6 to 101.3) (sea level to 50,000 ft)

VersaTek Hardware Installation The VersaTek scanning electronics hardware is simple to setup and run. Follow the instructions below for correct hardware setup.

Note: the following setup procedure uses an 8-port VersaTek Hub. The procedure is the same for the 2-port Hub.

System Assembly

1. Lift the latch on the top of the handle.

2. Slide the sensor tab with the "This Side UP" legend facing the raised handle latch (see figure at right).

3. Slide the tab in until it reaches its mechanical stop. Do not force the tab into the handle.

4. Close the latch completely.


Important ! Be sure to treat the sensor wi th care, not to bend or fold the sensor or sensor neck, as this may result in creasing or crinkling and can damage the sensor.

5. Connect the CAT5E Cable to the Hub’s CH1 (channel 1) cable port (shown at right). Connect the other end of the cable to the Handle. Connect the other Cables to their respective ports in the same way; for as many as is required for your system.

6. Connect the USB cable to the USB Cable port on the Hub (shown at right). Connect the other end to the USB port on the PC or Laptop.

7. Plug the included AC adapter into a wall outlet. Connect the AC adapter cable into the hub unit (shown at right). Make sure the green Power LED light on the hub illuminates. The green CH1 (channel 1) Port LED should also illuminate.

Starting the software After starting the Tekscan software, the message below the Real-time window should be “Ready.” If this message is “MISALIGNED!” remove and reinsert the sensor into the Handle. If the “Sensor OK” message still does not appear, consult the Troubleshooting section.

When the hardware and software are properly installed, a sensor is properly inserted into the Handle, and the correct map (sensor type) is selected, the orange communication LED light is displayed on the Hub unit. This indicates the sensor is communicating with the software on the PC or laptop.

The software is now ready to display pressure detected by the sensor in the Real-time window.


VersaTek Maintenance and Care

• The VersaTek system components cannot be autoclaved.

• Do not let any liquid drip onto the electronics inside the Handles or Hub. If this occurs, the components can stop working and must be allowed to dry for 24 hours. You can use your air syringe, however, to significantly reduce this drying time. Do not attempt to dry out the Handles or Hub using any other method, or you may destroy the delicate electronics.

• To properly clean the device, wipe down the Handles or Hub with a 70% Isopropyl Alcohol solution. To do this, slightly dampen a cloth with the alcohol solution, careful not to soak or saturate the cloth. Then wipe the components after use.

• Do not connect the VersaTek Hub or Handles to the Ethernet port of a PC, laptop or wall outlet. Do not loop a cable from Channel to Channel on the Hub. Doing so may damage the VersaTek System.

VersaTek 8-Port Hub Synch and Trigger Ports

Note: Use of the Synch and Trigger Ports require the opt ional “External Trigger Synch” sof tware. This sof tware is an opt ional purchase for Clinical sof tware users, but comes standard in Research sof tware. For more information about the Synch and Trigger Ports, refer to “The External Trigger

Synch Sof tware” appendix wi thin your sof tware Help Fi le.

VersaTek 8-Port Hub Trigger Port The Trigger Port responds to the change from an open to a closed circuit that will trigger starting a Tekscan recording. With the “Stop Triggering” method set to “External,” it can also stop a recording. Tekscan offers the optional trigger switch (Part #ZCAB-TRIGGER-ASSY-VERSATEK), however, any electronic device that can open or close a circuit can be used.

To use the Trigger Port with the Tekscan Trigger switch, plug it into the connector. Tekscan’s Trigger switch has momentary behavior. When pressed, it is closed, and when released, it is open. Using Tekscan’s “Start Triggering” and “Stop Triggering” settings in the software, this Trigger Switch can be used to start and stop a Tekscan recording.

VersaTek 8-Port Hub Synch Port The VersaTek 8-Port Hub Synch Port is a BNC connector port. It offers the capability to trigger an external signal. The parameters that govern how the signal operates are determined by the “Synch Output Type” and “Synch Polarity” options, found in the Data Acquisition Parameters dialog (under the "Options" menu).

Note: These parameters are only v isible i f the opt ional “External Trigger Synch Sof tware”

is installed.


Ruggedized TireScan System (Optional) The VersaTek TireScan system is also available in a new rugged package. The Ruggedized TireScan System includes Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosures, a Sensor Mounting Platform, a protective Polyester Sensor Cover, a Leading Drive Plate (for tire roll-on), a Trailing Drive Plate (for tire roll-off), an 8-port VersaTek Hub and the PB100G Sensor Equilibration/Calibration Device. Each ruggedized enclosure contains the electronics boards for two scanning handles. Each enclosure has a hinged cover with an O-ring seal that is used to protect the electronics and isolate them from dirt and dust. The enclosure accepts sensors with "T" tabs and "D-T" tabs that are on 2.5 inch centers. The enclosures have one large alignment pin in the center and two smaller pins at the back corners of where the sensor tab will sit. These pins assure that all the electronic contact pads on the sensor line up and have good contact with all the pogo pins on the scanning electronics boards. There are membrane switches and LED indicator lights for power, communication and sensor alignment on top of each enclosure to indicate the status of each board and sensor tab. This scanning enclosure can be used with the new 8400 and 8405 sensors as well as the 8050, 5026 and 7501 sensors. The TVR8400 system includes two enclosures containing the electronics of four VersaTek handles. The TVR8405 system includes three enclosures. The Ruggedized TireScan System is designed so that the sensor can be equilibrated while mounted on the sensor mounting platform, without having to disconnect and reconnect the sensor from the enclosures. For a full description of each of the Ruggedized TireScan System components, refer to the VersaTek Component Descriptions section. Benefits of the Ruggedized TireScan System:

• Each enclosure houses the electronics for 2 VersaTek handles • Improved sensor / electronics board connection method (locator pins) • Designed for both Sensor #8400 and #8405 • Sensor can be used with PB100G while mounted on the sensor mounting platform, without the need to

disconnect/reconnect the sensor from the enclosures • Membrane switches on the enclosures and LED status indicators on both the enclosures and the hub

The following image displays the assembled "Ruggedized TireScan System" (with the 8400 sensor)


Ruggedized TireScan System Assembly The TireScan Platform ships unassembled. The following instructions explain the proper procedure for assembling the system.

1. Position the Sensor Mounting Platform on a flat surface and align the Ruggedized VersaTek Scanning Electronics Enclosures. One side of the platform has 15 screws. This side is mounted with the enclosures. For the purposes of orientation, this side is referred to as the bottom side. If using the 8400 Sensor, 2 enclosures are attached to the platform on the bottom side. The leftmost enclosure's left screw position will be aligned with the platform's third screw position from the left. The second enclosure's rightmost screw position will then be aligned with the platform's third screw position from the right (this alignment is shown in the image below left). If using the 8405 Sensor, three enclosures are instead attached to the platform. In this situation, the leftmost enclosure's leftmost screw position is aligned with the platform's leftmost screw (shown below right). The other two enclosures are situated adjacent to this enclosure so that they butt each other.

2. With the proper alignment in place, screw each of the enclosures in place with two enclosure screws for each enclosure (shown below). The middle hole on the enclosure does not require a screw, only the two outer left and right edge screws of the enclosure require fastening. The screws are provided.


3. Each enclosure houses two sensor tabs. In the example below, the 8400 sensor (with four sensor tabs) is placed into the two enclosures. First open both enclosures. You will notice that each enclosure has two sets of guide pins (one larger pin at the outer edge of the enclosure and two smaller pins at the inner corner and inner middle of the enclosure). Each sensor tab has three corresponding holes. Place the first sensor tab onto one set of pins, and then the second sensor tab onto the second set of pins. The Sensor tabs should be situated so that the guide pins slip through the sensor tab holes (shown below).

When finished, repeat this step for the other enclosure.

4. With the tabs in place, gently close the top of the first enclosure. Ensure that all tabs are properly placed before closing the top of the enclosure, as tabs that slip from the guide pins can potentially damage the sensor once the enclosure is screwed shut. Once the top of the enclosure is closed, screw the top of the enclosure to the bottom half with two provided enclosure screws (shown at right). The screws should be fastened through the top of the enclosure on the left and right enclosure edges which are closest to the sensor. Do the same for the other enclosure.


5. Next, line up the clear Polyester Sensor Cover so that the side with two screw holes lines up with the two screw holes in the middle outer edge of each enclosure. The cover is butted against the edge of the two enclosures (shown at right).

6. Place the Bottom Edge Plate over the cover (shown

below left). Ensure that the counterbore (beveling) on the screw holes are facing up, and screw in place using the two provided platform screws (shown below right). It is important that you do not tighten these screws all the way, as the cover will need to be shifted slightly to line up along the other platform edges. For now, leave them loosely screwed in.

7. Next, place one of the Drive Plates over the cover on the left or right side of the sensor (shown at right). Ensure that the beveled edge is flush with the flat surface of the platform, and that the counterbore (beveling) on the screw holes are facing up.

Note: Both the Leading and Trai ling Drive Plates are the same, and can be used interchangeably (ei ther on the lef t or right side of the sensor).

Adjust the cover under the drive plate so that all screw holes are aligned. Then loosely screw in the 6 provided base plate screws so that the drive plate is comfortably in place. Repeat this process for the other drive plate on the opposite side of the sensor (left or right).


8. Place the Top Edge Plate over the cover along the top edge of the sensor. Ensure that the counterbore (beveling) on the screw holes are facing up (shown below left). Adjust the cover under the top edge plate so that all screw holes are aligned (shown below right). Then screw in the top edge plate using the six provided platform screws.

9. Once the top edge plate is in place, tighten all the platform screws on all sides of the sensor so they are firmly in place. The system is now assembled.

Connect the attached enclosures' CAT5E cables with RJ45 connectors into the VersaTek Hub channel ports in sequence. If looking at the sensor with the enclosures on the far (opposite) side, the cables must be connected A through D from left to right on the Hub Then connect the Hub USB cable to the PC or laptop. The image at left will help to illustrate.

Refer to the VersaTek Hardware Installation section for further installation instructions (specifically steps 5-7).

Note: To disassemble the Ruggedized TireScan System, reverse the above order. For example, i f a new sensor needs to be inserted into the assembly, you must f irst disassemble the system, insert the

sensor, and then reassemble the system.


The following displays the dimensions of the TVR8400 system. All linear dimensions are in inches.


DUAL SYSTEM The following section provides information on the Dual System hardware, and procedures for installation and setup.

Component Identification The following table provides a view of all the components that ship with your system:

PC Interface Board (SR-2)

Data Handle with Cable

Installation CD

User Manual

Also Included:

Tekscan Sensor(s) -- Depends upon application. *Note: System components can differ depending on your order.

TireScan Configurations: The Dual PCI system is used with the TireScan system. The following configurations are standard configurations. Note that custom configurations may be available depending upon your application. TireScan System (7101)

• 2 Dual Data Acquisition Handles • 1 (2) Port PCI Interface Card (Standard Board = PCI) • 1 TireScan Software CD with #7101 map • 1 TireScan Sensor #7101 (Standard Psat = 300) • 1 PB100B Equilibration and Calibration Device • 1 Operating Manual


TireScan System (8000)

• 2 Dual Data Acquisition Handles • 1 (2) Port PCI Interface Card (Standard Board = PCI) • 1 TireScan Software with #8000 map • 1 TireScan Sensor #8000 (Standard Psat = 300) • 1 PB100B or PB100C Equilibration and Calibration Device • 1 Operating Manual

TireScan System (8050)

• 8 Dual Data Acquisition Handles • 2 (4) Port PCI Interface Cards (Standard Board = PCI) • 1 TireScan Software with #8050Q map • 1 TireScan Sensor #8050 (Standard Psat = 300) • 1 PB100C Equilibration and Calibration Device • 1 Operating Manual

PC Interface Board (SR-2) The interface is how the sensor pressure data is brought into the computer so that it is available to the software. The PC Interface Board (SR-2) is inserted into a 16-bit PCI expansion slot inside your computer. Each card can accommodate 4 Dual Handles. This card is displayed below:

Dual Handles The Dual Handle gathers data from the sensor and processes it so that it can be sent easily to the computer. The sensor tab is placed into the sensor handle. The handle then connects to the PC Interface Board inside your computer. The sensor handle may also be used to start a recording. Pressing the long blue button on the top of the sensor handle does this. This function is referred to as ‘Remote Recording’, and may not be used to stop a recording. The handle has a latch on its topside. In the “Up” position, the latch retracts the contact pins inside the handle to allow insertion of the sensor tab. To insert a sensor into the handle:

1. Lift the latch on the handle.

2. Slide the sensor tab with the This Side UP legend facing the raised handle latch. Slide the tab in until it reaches its mechanical stop. Do not force the tab into the handle.


3. Close the latch. After following this procedure and starting the TireScan software, the message below the real-time window for the sensor should be ‘Sensor OK’. If the message is ‘MISALIGNED’, re-insert the sensor using the above procedure. If the ‘Sensor OK’ message still does not appear, consult the ‘Troubleshooting’ section.

Caut ion! Do not allow the handle to hang from the sensor. The handle may become damaged, result ing in a misaligned sensor.

The following image displays the TireScan sensor setup with an 8-handle conf igurat ion:

Dual System Hardware Installation

Note: Refer to the manual supplied with your computer for any speci f ic detai ls on installing a board in your computer’s expansion slot .

Warnings:

1. Unplug your computer before beginning installation.

2. Touch the metal plating on the computer to ground yourself prior to handling the interface board to reduce the chance of static discharge.

3. Never force the interface board into a computer slot, and be careful not to twist or bend the board.


To install your TireScan interface board into a typical computer:

1. Disconnect power and remove the cover from your computer.

2. Remove the slot-cover plate from the available expansion slot with a screwdriver (shown at right).

3. Carefully insert the interface board into the slot. Make sure to

touch a metal object before handling the interface board.

4. Fasten the interface board firmly to the computer using the screw from the slot-cover plate.

5. Test the system thoroughly to ensure it works correctly, before replacing the computer cover. Reinstall the

computer cover.

6. Plug the TireScan handle cable into the receptacle on the TireScan interface board. The receptacle should be unobstructed and accessible at the back of your computer.

7. Plug your computer back in and turn the power on.


SENSORS The TireScan sensor is an ultra-thin (.004", 0.10mm) flexible printed circuit. It has up to 2288 individual pressure sensing locations, which may also be referred to as ‘sensing elements’, ‘sensels’, or ‘cells’. The sensels are arranged in rows and columns (Cartesian coordinates) on the sensor. The sensor acts as a variable resistor in an electrical circuit. When the sensor is unloaded, its resistance is very high; when a force is applied to the sensor, the resistance decreases. This output resistance is then converted to a digital value (raw sum) in the range of 0 to 255.

Because of the nature of the pressure sensitive layer that is the heart of the TireScan sensors, it is possible to produce sensors of varying sensitivity. Sensors with pressure ranges as low as 0 - 5 PSI (0 - 260 mmHg) and as high as 0 - 30,000 PSI (0 - 206 Mpa) have been produced. The active sensing area of the sensor is surrounded by substrate material that contains conductive leads. These leads connect the rows and columns of the active sensing area to the terminal section or tab of the sensor. The topside of the sensor is labeled This Side UP near the terminal section. The sensor tab must be inserted into the handle with the proper orientation.

Sensor Maintenance and Care

• To properly clean the sensors, wipe them with a 70% Isopropyl Alcohol solution. To do this, slightly dampen a cloth with the alcohol solution, careful not to soak or saturate the cloth. Then wipe the sensors after each use.

• Sensors should always be stored flat in either the envelope in which they were shipped, or some other protective cover. Improper storage can adversely affect sensor life.

• Sensor Replacement/Disposal: Dispose of sensors in any waste container. Sensors are not biohazardous waste.

SCAN RATE Scan rate is defined as Frequency, or the number of frames that are recorded each second (frames/second). Scan rate is an important consideration when evaluating dynamic events. Faster scan rate gives greater visibility and insight into rapid dynamic events, and provides finer time resolution.

The following chart outlines the maximum scan rates possible with the TireScan systems. Scan rates can vary depending upon the sensor and number of handles used.

Sensor Map # of VersaTek

Handles Connection

Type VersaTek Hardware

Scan Rate (Hz.) 3150H 6 T Up to 537 3150Q 4 T Up to 537

5400NH 6 T Up to 258 5400NQ 4 T Up to 258

7101 2 CH-T Up to 200 7101D 4 CH-T Up to 160

7101D-2 4 CH-T Up to 160 7101Q 8 CH-T Up to 200 7501 2 CH-T Up to 200 8000 2 CH-T Up to 200

8000Q 8 CH-T Up to 200 8050Q 8 CH-T Up to 200 8400 4 CH-T Up to 100 8405 6 CH-T Up to 70

For further information about setting your Scan Rate or Frequency, refer to the About Data Acquisition Parameters section.


SOFTWARE TireScan software is a 32-bit application. For software compatibility, see the System Requirements section. This section describes the many different components of the software, as well as the function of map files.

MAIN WINDOW When you initiate the TireScan software program, the Main Window is displayed on your computer screen. The Main Window consists of the Menu Bar, Tool Bar, and Main Status Bar, and may contain one or more Real-time Window(s), Movie Window(s), Graph Window(s), and/or Legend Menu Bar(s). The window that is selected is considered the active window. Only one window (Movie, Real-time, Graph, or Legend) can be active at one time, and the title bars of the other windows will be grayed out. The Main Window, and its components, are shown in the figure at right.

TITLE BARS

Each window (Main, Real-time, Movie, and Graph) has a title bar along the top, which displays the name (title) of that window (e.g. ‘Real-time 1’ or ‘Movie1.fsx’). If that window is paused, ‘(Paused)’ is added to the title. If a recording is in progress, ‘(Rec)’ is added to the title. Within brackets, the Sensor Map name is listed, then a colon, and then the Sensitivity Adjustment setting (found under Tools -> Adjust Sensitivity). Each title bar has the usual MS Windows control button at the left end and minimize, maximize and close buttons at the right end. Only one window may be active at one time; the active window’s title bar will be blue, while the deactivated windows’ title bars will be gray.

The following shows the various elements that make up the title bar: "Realt ime1 (F:5051:Default)"

Realtime1 is the name of the movie window.

F:5051 is the name of the sensor map Default is the Sensitivity Adjustment setting

As you can see here, the title bar for a Real-time window can provide some very useful information.


MENU BAR

The Menu Bar provides the pull-down menus used to control the TireScan program. Each Menu Bar option is described in detail in the ‘Main Menu’ section. When no Movie or Real-time windows are open, the Menu Bar contains only the File, Options, and Help menus. When a window is open, the other menus become available (see figure above).

Note: Not all Menu Bar funct ions are avai lable at all t imes. When a funct ion is unavai lable, i t is grayed out .

TOOLBARS Most TireScan functions can be performed using the Toolbar. The Toolbar provides the same options as the Menu Bar, but with icons replacing pull-down menus. Each icon on the Toolbar has a corresponding pull-down item in the Menu Bar; however, only the most frequently used items on the Menu Bar have an icon on the Toolbar.

Note that not all Toolbar funct ions are avai lable at all t imes. When a funct ion is unavai lable, i t wi ll be grayed out . Some funct ions may also be opt ional sof tware features.

The Upper (Main) Toolbar

The Lower (Advanced) Toolbar

The upper (Main) Toolbar and lower (Advanced) Toolbar are “docked” to the top side of the application window above the Tab Bar and below the Menu Bar by default.


The Main and Advanced Toolbars can be moved independently of each other. For example, if you want to have a single toolbar, grab the bottom toolbar by the dotted line on the left side. Note that the cursor turns into a four-way arrow (shown below left). Then move it to the right of the toolbar above (shown below right).

If, as in the image above left, you do not have enough space to display all the toolbar icons (due to the width of the application window being too narrow), a small drop-down arrow is displayed to the right side of the toolbar. Click this arrow and the remaining icons open on-screen (shown below). You can then select the icon of your choice.

To “undock” a Toolbar, move it away from the top side of the application window towards the center of the application window. The Toolbar will gain a Title Bar, and can then be moved around the screen by grabbing this Title Bar. You can also turn the single row Toolbar into a double-row Toolbar. To do this, hover your mouse over the left or right side of the Toolbar. When you see the cursor turn into a two-way arrow (shown below left), click and drag the side inward until it becomes two rows of icons (shown below right). To turn the Toolbar into a single row of icons again, reverse this process, pulling the side of the Toolbar outward until it becomes a single row.


To dock the Toolbar to a different side of the window, move it close to the side you want until the Toolbar “snaps” into place (shown below).

Note: The Menu Bar can also be moved, sized, docked, and undocked from the applicat ion in the same way as the Toolbars.

Showing/Hiding Icons on the Toolbar

You can show or hide icons on either of the Toolbars. This gives you the freedom to tailor the Toolbar to your needs. If you never use an icon, you can simply hide it. If you always use a command or icon, you can keep it displayed. To show or hide an icon, click on the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Toolbar. Then hover and hold your mouse over the “Add or Remove Buttons” command. This opens the “Advanced” command. Slide your mouse over this command and all the icons located on the “Advanced” toolbar are displayed in a menu (shown below). By default, they are all checked (displayed). Click on any icon in the menu in order to hide it (remove it from the Toolbar). Repeat this process to remove any further icons. To add the icon back to the toolbar, go back into the Advanced menu of icons, and click the icon once again to check it. The icon is now displayed on the Toolbar.


TAB BAR Directly under the Toolbars is the Tab Bar. Each separate window (Real-Time, Movie, or Graph) has its own associated tab. When a window has focus (its Title bar is highlighted), the tab moves to the front of the tab stack and the tab’s font is boldened. You can make a window active (and give it focus) by clicking the Window’s Tab. In addition, each tab will have its own color. Note that the Farm Tread 7100.fsx movie is located at the top of the layer stack in the image above and below.

On the right side of the Tab Bar, there are three icons. The left and right arrows are used in situations where the tabs cannot fit in the width of space provided along the Tab Bar. If you have more tabs than can be accommodated along this Tab Bar, use the arrows to move the Tab Bar left or right and scroll through the tabs. The “x” icon is used to close the currently active movie (the movie that is highlighted and has focus).


MAIN STATUS BAR

The Main Status Bar provides information about what is happening on your screen at any given moment. When the cursor is over a Tool Bar icon, the left side of the status bar will give a description of that icon; otherwise, it will say ‘Ready’. When the cursor is over a Real-time or Movie window, the right side of the status bar will give the cursor position (‘Row, Col’), and the applied load (‘Load’) on the sensor at that point. Note that the cursor position corresponds to the actual row and column on the sensor (the origin, or zero point, is the top left corner of the window). You will see pressures in finer detail here in comparison to the ranges of pressure shown by the color bands on the display. The Load (pressure) shown may be affected by the display mode, such as Fixed Area Averaging, as well as the Legend’s lower limit. Pressure values below this limit are disregarded, thereby changing the total Load value.

REAL-TIME WINDOW The Real-time window displays the color-coded pressure information. This pressure data is displayed as it is happening, or in real-time. If no pressure is on the sensor, a blank Real-time window will appear. A real-time window will be opened when the software is initiated, and a different window can be opened by selecting File>>New Recording or New Session. The number of real-time windows that may be opened is dependent on the number of handles connected to the system (one for each handle). The TireScan software provides numerous options for displaying, recording, and analyzing the real-time data, which are described later. The Real-time Status Bar is located at the bottom of the real-time window, and displays the sensor status (or the frame count of a recording in progress), Area, and Force. The left side of this status bar displays the sensor status; either ‘Sensor OK’ or ‘MISALIGNED!' If this message is ‘MISALIGNED!’ remove and reinsert the sensor into the handle, ensuring that the sensor is right side up, and the handle latch is completely down. When the real-time window data is being recorded, the left side of the status bar displays the ‘Rec. Frame’, or the frame count of the recording in progress.

Clicking the left-most section of this status bar is another way to Pause the screen (see the ‘View’ menu). When the indicator is popped out, it means that the screen is ‘Paused’ (see figure above).The center of this status bar will display a red and white icon to warn you if the Legend’s lower limit has been changed (refer to ‘Legend’ section).


Area and Force are reported at the right side of the Real-time Status Bar. The Area shown is the calculated sensor loading area, and the Force is the total force on the sensor, as displayed in the window. The Area that is displayed here may be affected by changing the display mode, such as Fixed Area Averaging, or by raising the Legend's lower limit.

Note: Pressure values below the Legend's lower limit are disregarded, thereby changing the displayed Area and Force values.

MOVIE WINDOW The Movie Window displays a previously recorded movie. Movie files can be opened by clicking the Open Movie icon in the Tool Bar, or by selecting File --> Open Movie. Only TireScan recordings, with the extension *.fsx, can be opened. The TireScan software provides many options for displaying and analyzing recordings, which are described in later sections. The Movie Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Movie Window, and displays the Frame count, Area, and Force. The left side of the status bar displays the frame count, which is the current frame number vs. the total number in the movie. Clicking the left-most section of this status bar is another way to Pause the screen (see the ‘View’ menu). When the indicator is popped out, it means that the movie is ‘Paused’. Right clicking this area and entering a frame number allows the user to jump to the desired frame number in the movie. The center of this status bar will display a red and white icon to warn you if the lower limit on the Legend has been changed (refer to ‘Legend’ section). Area and Force are reported at the right side of the Movie Status Bar. The Area shown is the calculated sensor loading area, and the Force is the total force on the sensor, as displayed in the window. The Area that is displayed here may be affected by changing the display mode, such as Fixed Area Averaging, or by raising the Legend's lower limit.

Note: Pressure values below the Legend's lower limit are disregarded, thereby changing the displayed Area and Force values.

In addition, there is a Multiple Window View button located in the middle of the status bar. Clicking this area opens 3 windows at once: a 2-D View, 3-D View, and Force vs. Time graph. Note that this is only available when working with a previously saved movie, and is not available within a real-time window. If a movie or snapshot is recorded, the Multiple Window View button will be enabled. Clicking it will open the "Save As" dialog box if the movie has not been saved. Once the movie is saved, the Multiple View will open on-screen, and enable you to view both 2-D and 3-D views at once.


GRAPH WINDOW The Graph Window displays the graph data from one or more Movie or Real-time windows. A Graph window is opened when an Object (tiles, box, or line) is placed in a Movie or Real-time window. The color-coded graph trace for that object will be displayed in the corresponding graph. The display attributes of each Graph are defined in the Analysis>> Properties menu.

To the right of the Graph in the window, the names of the corresponding Movie or Real-time windows are displayed, followed by the actual data value totals. If the information on the right side of the Graph window is not fully visible, this area can be expanded by dragging (with the cursor) the line that separates it from the actual graph. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more information on the TireScan graphing features.

LEGEND The Legend (shown below) shows the pressure range that corresponds to each of the 13 possible colors in any open Movie or Real-time window. The number shown on each color in the Legend is the lowest value in that color’s range. The values in the fields at the top and bottom of the legend are the upper and lower limits, respectively. The pressure units (or raw) are also displayed at the top of the legend. A legend can be placed in the Main Window by selecting Set Legend from the Options pull down menu, or clicking the corresponding Tool bar icon.

Note: The Legend was referred to as the ‘Pressure Scale’ in the MS-DOS -based sof tware and documentat ion.

A calibrated legend can be opened if the corresponding Movie or Real-time window has been calibrated; otherwise, only a raw legend may be opened. If it is a Raw legend, no pressure units will be associated with each range, and the default upper limit will be 255. All calibrated movies that are open simultaneously will be controlled by one calibrated legend. Likewise, all uncalibrated (raw) movies are controlled by one raw legend.

The pressure range represented by each color in the legend can be changed by increasing or decreasing the upper limit value. This limit can be changed (one increment at a time) by clicking the up or down arrow to the right of the number, or by typing in a new number. Decreasing this number will make the range of each color band smaller (finer), and increasing the number will make the range of each band larger. This upper limit does not, however, limit the high end of pressures displayed. All pressures above the maximum value will be displayed as red, but their values are still reported as Load in the Main Status Bar.

Note: Saturated sensels are a lways displayed as red, regardless of the Legend’s upper limit set t ing. However, unsaturated cells may be displayed as red based on this set t ing.

The legend’s lower limit can be changed in the same manner as the upper limit. Increasing this limit from 0 creates a threshold; sensed pressures below the value are disregarded, and will not be visible in the window as colors. In this way, this feature can be used to suppress the display of noise (usually caused by the presence of EMI or due to prolonged sensor use) that is indicated as low-level pressure. Note that pressures that are not displayed in the window are also not included in the Area, Force, or Load values reported in the Main, Movie, and Real-time Status Bars.


If the Legend’s lower limit is raised, a red and white icon (shown below) is added to the status bar(s) of any affected Movie and/or real-time windows, to remind you that this limit has been changed.

Note: Changing the Legend’s upper and lower limit values has no ef fect on the actual data, i t merely alters the appearance of the displayed data.

Tips:

• The upper and lower limits for the last calibrated and raw legend are saved when exiting TireScan, and are restored when you restart the application.

• If the numbers in the colored boxes are interspersed with blank colored boxes, then the legend limits are adjusted too low. Increase the upper limit or decrease the lower limit until all boxes have numbers.

• If colored boxes with no numbers appear next to each other in the top of the legend (except the red box), then the upper limit is adjusted too high. Decrease the upper limit until a good color distribution is obtained.

• You can easily identify saturated cells by increasing the upper limit until there is a blank colored box below the red box. When there is at least one blank box below the red box, all red cells in the display are saturated, meaning they have reached their maximum output, and can no longer measure any changes in pressure (i.e. further increases in force on saturated sensels do not increase the reported value).

• If you click the right mouse button while the cursor is over a Legend, the following additional options become available:

o Move - a four-way arrow appears, and the arrow keys (on your keyboard) can then be used to move the legend in the window. Simply selecting it with the cursor and dragging it to another location in the window can also move the legend.

o Close - removes the legend from the window. o Units - displays the Units of Measure dialog box. o Copy - the legend will be copied to the MS Windows clipboard. From the clipboard, the legend can be

pasted into other Windows applications as an image (bitmap) by selecting Edit>>Paste or Paste Special.

MAP FILES The software uses a file called a map to convert the pressure detected by the hardware into the pressure data displayed in the real-time window. The map filename is the same as the sensor number (printed on actual sensor). Each sensor has a map associated with it. Without the map file, information from the sensor cannot be understood by the software. When the hardware and software are properly installed, a sensor is properly inserted into the handle, and the correct map file (with extension *.mp) is selected, the real-time window will display the pressure detected by the sensor.

Note: A Real- t ime window will not open unless the hardware is properly connected.

MULTI-HANDLE MAP FILE FEATURE When using a Tekscan system with multiple handles, multiple real-time windows or “virtual” multi-sensor software maps, Tekscan software will retain the link between the sensor type, the map and calibration data for each handle. This greatly enhances the utility and ease of use of “Virtual” or Multi-sensor maps and multiple real-time windows. Each real-time and movie window is labeled with the handle letter and sensor map. Separate equilibration and calibration information will be maintained throughout the recording session for each handle.


TIRESCAN FILE EXTENSIONS File extensions are placed at the end of a file name, to differentiate one type of file from another. TireScan uses the following file extensions to designate various files: recordings (movies) sensor maps:

.fsx recordings (movies)

.mp sensor maps

.asc ASCII data files (Center of Force)

.asf ASCII data files (frames)

.asg ASCII data files (graphs)

.fbx object files

.cal calibration files

.equ equilibration files

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Instead of using a mouse to control the software, certain keys on the keyboard may be used for a variety of "shortcut" command access. These keys are defined below:

Note: Depending on your sof tware, some funct ions may be unavai lable. As a result , their equivalent shortcut key wi ll not be avai lable.

Shortcut Key Funct ion Shortcut Key Funct ion F1 Help F2 or Ctrl+R Record F3 or Ctrl+H Snapshot F4 or Ctrl+T Play / Stop F5 or Ctrl+F Play Forward F6 New Session F9 or Ctrl+P Print F10 Enable / Disable Peak View Ctrl+A Append Ctrl+B Play Backward Ctrl+C Copy Ctrl+E Edit Dialog Ctrl+M Edit Comments Ctrl+N New Recording Ctrl+O Open Movie Ctrl+S Save Ctrl+V or Left Arrow Play Previous Frame Ctrl+X or Right Arrow Play Next Frame Ctrl+F9 Print Preview Ctrl+F12 Exit Program Ctrl+Shift+L Load Object File Ctrl+Shift+S Save Object File Shift+F1 Context Help (Help On) Up Arrow Jump to First Frame Down Arrow Jump to Last Frame

When Editing a movie, there are additional shortcut keys that are available. To access these keys, an edit box or edit cell must first be placed in the movie window and have focus (the edit box or edit cell must be selected). Then you can use the following shortcut keys to navigate the edit box or edit cell:

Shortcut Key Funct ion Left Arrow Moves the edit box or edit cell one cell to the left Right Arrow Moves the edit box or edit cell one cell to the right Up Arrow Moves the edit box or edit cell one cell upward Down Arrow Moves the edit box or edit cell one cell downward Ctrl+Left Arrow Shifts the right side of the edit box one cell to the left (making the box smaller) Ctrl+Right Arrow Shifts the right side of the edit box one cell to the right (making the box larger) Ctrl+Up Arrow Shifts the bottom side of the edit box one cell upward (making the box smaller) Ctrl+Down Arrow Shifts the bottom side of the edit box one cell downward (making the box larger)


THE MAIN MENU The Main Menu section is a comprehensive look at each option in the Menu Bar. The most frequently used items in the Main Menu also have an icon on the Tool Bar. Familiarity with MS Windows is assumed, so menu items that have the same function in standard Windows applications are not described in this manual.

Note: Not all menu i tems are avai lable all of the t ime. When an opt ion is unavai lable, i t wi ll appear grayed out .

File Menu New Session: When beginning a new session, selecting this option will close all open windows (asking the user whether to save unsaved data), open a new real-time window, and reset all display options, as well as the sensitivity, calibration, and equilibration data.

Note: If you close the applicat ion, then restart the program and open a Real- t ime window, the display opt ions (e.g. 3-D Contours, COF, Rotat ion) and the sensi t iv i ty set t ing wi ll be

recalled.

New Recording: Opens a new real-time window, in addition to any other real-time or movie windows that are currently open. The new real-time window becomes the active window when it is opened. When New Recording is selected, the window size, display options (e.g. 3-D Contours, COF, Rotation), sensitivity, and equilibration and calibration data, are recalled from the previous real-time window. Open Movie: Displays the 'Open' dialog box, which allows you to open previously recorded TireScan recordings or snapshots (with the *.fsx file extension). You may also open this dialog box by clicking on the Open Movie icon in the Main Toolbar. To open multiple files, hold down the <CTRL> key and click to highlight the desired files. All selected files will be opened when you click ‘OK.’ Close: Closes the currently active movie or real-time window. Close All: Closes all open Movie, Real-time and Graph windows. You will be prompted to save any windows that have not been saved. Save Movie: Saves the current recording as a file, with the specific file name and location of your choice. TireScan movie files must have the extension *.fsx. Note that your system may limit file names to eight characters. Save Movie As: Saves the current movie, with the specific file name and location of your choice. This menu item is also available when a movie window is active, and can be used to save a movie under more than one file name. TireScan movie files must have the extension *.fsx. Note that your system may limit file names to eight characters.

Warning! If you open a DOS-version TireScan movie f i le, then ‘Save Movie As’ the same f i le name, i t wi ll overwri te the older f i le. You will then be unable to open this movie using the DOS sof tware.


Save ASCII: Saves the current TireScan movie or real-time window pressure (or center of force) data, or the current Graph data, as an ASCII (text) file, with the specific filename and location of your choice. The ‘Objects’ dialog box also contains a ‘Save ASCII’ button, which can be used to save graph data ASCII files. Frame data ASCII files must be saved with the extension *.asf, center of force (COF) ASCII files must be saved with the extension *.asc, and graph data must be saved with the extension *.asg. Refer to the ‘Analyzing a Recording’ section for more information.

Note: Window (Movie, Real- t ime, or Graph) backgrounds are always printed out as white, regardless of whether or not View>>Background White is selected.

Save View as Movie: Allows you to save the current movie frame, or view, as a movie file (with extension *.fsx). This new movie file will consist of one frame, and will be saved exactly as it appeared when saved. If any View menu items are in effect when Save View as Movie is selected, they will be retained in the saved file. Note that COF Trajectory will not be displayed by the saved view, since it only affects movies with more than one frame. Print: Allows you to print the currently active Real-time or Movie window to an MS Windows-compatible printer. The window will be printed exactly as it appears on the screen, and will include the options selected in Print Setup. Print Preview: Shows you exactly how your printed page will appear. It is recommended that you preview all printed pages to ensure that your setup is correct. Refer to the ‘Printing’ section for more information. Print Setup: Gives you a number of printing options that control what will be printed, and how this printed page will look. Refer to the ‘Printing’ section for more information. Exit: Closes the TireScan program.

Edit Menu Copy: A powerful tool that allows you to analyze pressure data in a spreadsheet or word processing program, compare TireScan movie frames, and create reports or documents using actual color movie frames. This command saves the currently active real-time window, movie frame, or Graph, to the MS Windows clipboard as both an image and as a text array of the actual pressure values. Once copied to the clipboard, this data can be pasted into other Windows applications as either a graphic (bitmap) or text by selecting Edit>>Paste Special. If Edit>>Paste is selected, the window’s sensor pressure data, as well as the comments, fields, and header information, will be automatically pasted in ASCII (text) format. The Copy option can also be selected by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is in a Real-time, Movie, or Graph window, and selecting Copy. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more information on the Copy menu item, as well as other available Copy options.

Note: This Copy command cannot be used to copy the Legend to the Windows clipboard. Refer to the ‘Legend’ sect ion for more information.

Comments: Opens up a dialog box that allows you to view, add, and edit the comments associated with a real-time or movie window. Real-time window comments are remembered until File>>New Session is selected or the software is restarted. When a real-time window is saved as a movie, the comments are included with the movie file. The comments for the movie can then only be changed by selecting Comments, changing the comments, and re-saving the movie file.


If a real-time window is active, Comments also allows you to add and edit the comment field names associated with that window. If the field names are changed and saved in a newly recorded movie, any later recordings will automatically be updated to these field names.

The Comments option can also be selected by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is in a real-time or movie window, and selecting Comments, or by accessing the ‘Comments’ tab in the Settings dialog box. Refer to the ‘Including Comments with a Recording’ section for more information.

Edit Mode: displays the ‘Edit’ dialog box, which enables you to modify a specific area of data within a movie or real-time window. Edit Mode allows you to place an edit box or edit cell in the active window, and then modify the sensels within this box. An edit box or cell can be used to remove data from one or more sensels, or to average sensel reading(s) with those of its neighbors, in either a movie or a real-time window. Refer to the ‘Editing’ section for more information on using and manipulating edit boxes and cells.

Cut Frames: opens the ‘Cut Frames’ dialog box, which enables you to discard unwanted frames from a recording using a number of methods. The three options in the ‘Cut Method’ pull-down field are ‘Cut Frames’, ‘Keep Frames’, and ‘Filtered’. ‘Cut Frames’ allows you to discard specific frames, ‘Keep Frames’ allows you to keep specific frames, and ‘Filtered’ allows you to discard frames whose total applied force is less than a specified minimum value.

Load Edit File: enables you to load an existing edit file, with the extension *.fed, into the currently active movie or real-time window. An edit file is simply the saved edit boxes and/or cells from a previously edited window.

Save Edit File: enables you to save the edit box(s) and/or cell(s) from the currently active movie or real-time window as an edit file, with the extension *.fed. These edit boxes/cells can then be placed into a movie or real-time window by loading the edit file. Refer to the ‘Editing’ section for more information on the Edit Mode, Cut Frames, and Load/Save.

View Menu The View menu items and corresponding Toolbar icons control the primary TireScan display functions for the active movie or real-time window. When one of the 2-D or 3-D items is enabled, it will have a dot beside it in the pull-down menu, and its Toolbar icon will be depressed. Note that the sensor data does not change when changing modes; only the appearance of the display is altered.

Note: When any of these View opt ions is selected, i t af fects all open windows. To apply the selected opt ion to only the

act ive window, press the <CTRL> key and select the opt ion simultaneously.

Note: Any View menu i tems that are in ef fect are reset to the default when Fi le>>New Session is selected. They are

saved when the program is closed and reopened, or Fi le>>New Recording is selected.


2-D View: Displays the recording in two-dimensional form with the color of each sensel location representing the pressure sensed at that point. This display looks the closest to the actual raw output of the sensor, and individual sensels can be identified. 2-D is the default view (shown at right).

2-D Contours View: Displays the recording as a two-dimensional, contoured image (shown at left). The sharp corners of the sensor output are smoothed, making the pressure boundaries easier to discern.

3-D Wireframe View: Displays the recording as a three-dimensional image (shown at right), in which higher pressures are shown as peaks. The relative peaks provide visual insight into the gradients within each color band. ‘Wireframe’ means that the image is not a solid image, and the image is represented by a series of interconnected lines. This display can often provide a better view of complex 3-D data.

3-D Contours View: Displays the recording as a three-dimensional image (shown at left), in which higher pressures are shown as solid peaks. The 3-D Contour image will look similar to the 3-D Wireframe image, except that the image will be represented as a solid object. This display can provide a view of complex data that is easier to comprehend than the 3-D Wireframe image. 3-D Reverse View: Displays the recording as a three-dimensional image (shown at right), in which higher pressures are shown as inverse

peaks. The 3-D Reverse image is simply an inverted, or reversed, 3-D Contours image. 3-D Reverse is especially useful for viewing the exact footprint of the applied force.

The 3-D displays are especially useful in comparing pressure areas that are above the maximum pressure setting on the Legend. In the 2-D displays, all pressures above the maximum pressure setting are shown as red, and cannot be distinguished from each other; whereas in 3-D Contour, Wireframe, and Reverse modes, pressures are displayed as peaks, and relative pressure differences are readily apparent.


When using a "3-D" view, a separate "rotate" function is available. Moving your cursor over the screen, you will notice the cursor changes to a "hand" icon. Left-clicking your mouse will grab the 3-D image and you can then rotate the display in the direction of your choice by navigating with your mouse.

Note that the bot tom plane of the image is not avai lable, and rotat ing the image past this point wi ll f lip the image to show the next avai lable plane. The arrow keys on the keyboard can also be

used to shi f t the image incrementally in any direct ion.

Averaging: Displays the image with each cell’s pressure value modified to reflect the value of its neighbors. This results in a smoother image. Averaging is available in all View modes. When Averaging is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu, and its Toolbar icon will be depressed. As an example, in the group of nine cells shown below, the averaged pressure value of "X" is calculated using the following equation:

Where the load recorded in each cell (A-G) is used to calculate the averaged pressure in cell "X". Note that if cell "X" is at the edge of the sensor, the values of the neighboring cells that are not loaded are not used in the calculation.

Fixed Area Averaging: This is very similar to the Averaging option, but calculates the cell’s pressure value in a slightly different manner, which does not increase the total contact area in the display. Another difference between the two types of averaging is that cells with zero load are disregarded in this option, whereas they are factored into the formula with a zero value in the Averaging option. This option is available in all View modes. When Fixed Area Averaging is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu, and its Toolbar icon will be depressed. As an example, in the group of nine cells shown below, the averaged pressure value of "X" is calculated using the following equation:

The denominator is reduced to reflect the "weight" of the cells with zero load in the equation. For example, if cell "A" is zero, the denominator is reduced by half. If "D" is zero, the denominator is reduced by one. If "X" is zero, the denominator is reduced by two.


Movie Without Averaging or Fixed Area Averaging Applied:

Movie wi th Averaging applied.

Movie With Fixed Area Averaging Applied.

• Movie Averaging: Displays the averaged pressure value of each cell for the entire recording, or for a selected range of frames, in one or more composite frame(s). When a movie has been averaged into a single frame, the Movie Status Bar will read ‘Averaged Frame’ (followed by the range of frames that were averaged); when a movie has been averaged into multiple frames, the Movie Status Bar will reflect the updated number of frames. This menu item is not available in real-time mode, and will not affect a snapshot, since a snapshot contains only one frame. When Movie Averaging is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu and the movie playback options will be unavailable. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more detailed information. Movie Averaging applies only to the active window, and is not affected by the <CTRL> key.


Movie Contact Averaging: Displays the averaged pressure value of each cell for the entire recording, or for a selected range of frames, in one or more composite frame(s). This menu item is very similar to the Movie Averaging option, except that it calculates the cell’s average pressure value in a slightly different manner. The difference between these two types of movie averaging is that cells with zero load are disregarded in this option, whereas they are factored into the formula with a zero value in the Movie Averaging option.

When a movie has been averaged into a single frame, the Movie Status Bar will read ‘Averaged Frame’ (followed by the range of frames that were averaged); when a movie has been averaged into multiple frames, the Movie Status Bar will reflect the updated number of frames. This menu item is not available in real-time mode, and will not affect a snapshot, since a snapshot contains only one frame. When Movie Contact Averaging is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu and the movie playback options will be unavailable. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more detailed information. Movie Contact Averaging applies only to the active window, and is not affected by the <CTRL> key.

COF (Center of Force): Shows the center of all of the forces in the Movie or Real-time window. This feature is used to show how the forces are ‘balanced’ on the sensor. The center point is represented on the screen by a gray version of the red and white icon that represents COF on the Toolbar. You can view the COF for each separate box and tile in the Movie or Real-time window, in addition to the COF for the entire window. COF is only available in the 2-D display modes. COF is ‘toggled’ on and off; when it is enabled, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu, and its Toolbar icon will be depressed. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more information.

COF (Center of Force) Trajectory: Displays the movement of the Center of Force for the duration of the recorded movie. The movement of the COF can be tracked by playing a movie one frame at a time, with COF Trajectory selected. The trajectory is represented on the screen by a gray and white line that ‘trails’ the COF marker. In a real-time window, COF Trajectory simply shows the center of force. If Peak is also selected, the trajectory of the COF for the entire movie will be shown, and the playback controls will be unavailable. As an optional feature, you can view the COF Trajectory for each separate box and tile in a Movie window, in addition to the trajectory for the entire window.

Max Area Frame: Advances the current movie to the frame that has the largest contact area. The contact area is displayed in the center of the Movie Status Bar. Note that only pressures above the legend’s lower limit (threshold) are displayed, and accounted for in the contact area. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more details.

Peak: Displays the maximum pressure value that each cell reached during the recording, in one composite frame. The movie playback options are not available when this item is selected. Peak is available in all 2-D and 3-D display modes. Peak will not affect a snapshot since a snapshot contains only one frame. If Peak is in effect while COF Trajectory is enabled, the trajectory of the COF for the entire range of frames is displayed. Peak is toggled on and off; when it is enabled, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu, its Toolbar icon will be depressed, and the Movie Status Bar will say ‘Peak’.

Pause: Causes the active movie or real-time window to freeze, or to ignore all movie playback or recording commands. Pausing a real-time window causes the ‘Sensor OK’ Status Bar pane to pop out, and pausing a Movie window causes the Frame Count indicator Status Bar pane to pop out. Clicking on the ‘Frame Count’ or ‘Sensor OK’ pane will toggle Pause on and off. When a movie or real-time window is paused, a check mark is placed beside it in the pull-down menu, and ‘(Paused)’ is added to the title bar at the top of the window. Pause applies only to the active window, and is not affected by the <CTRL> key.


Background White: Changes the background areas (where no pressure is sensed) of the active Movie, Real-time, or Graph window from black to white. Changing the background color to black is useful when viewing lighter colors, such as yellow, in the display. This item can also be selected by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is over a window, and selecting Background White. When Background White is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu.

Zoom To: Allows you to resize the display inside the active movie or real-time window. Percentages refer to the actual size of the sensor. Zoom percentages are available up to 400%, and any size up to this value can be entered in the ‘Custom Fit’ area. The default size (when 2-D or 2-D Contours is in effect) is Fit in Window. Zoom To applies to only the active window, and is not affected by the <CTRL> key.

Note: The displayed image si ze is dependent on a number of factors, so when the image is zoomed to 100%, i t may

not be exact ly the same size as the actual sensor.

When you are in one of the 3-D views, an additional zooming feature becomes available. TireScan allows you to change the vertical size of the 3-D view by adjusting the ‘Percent Vertical’ percentage between 10 and 100%, or by entering a custom value.

Rotate: Turns the entire view clockwise in 90 degrees increments from its current orientation. All 2-D and 3-D views are rotated clockwise. When a window is rotated, the zero point (which is initially in the upper left corner of each window) is also rotated. If you get confused at any point, put the cursor over a sensel and look at the coordinates displayed in the status bar to get the true row and column numbers.

When in 3-D Contour, Wireframe, or Reverse modes, a separate ‘Rotate’ function is also available. Click anywhere on the screen with your cursor to rotate the display 5 degrees counter-clockwise. The cursor (arrow) keys on the keyboard have the same effect as clicking the mouse cursor. Hold down the <SHIFT> key while clicking to get top-forward vertical rotation. Hold down the <CTRL> key with either of the previous functions to get the reverse effect.

Mirror Columns: mirrors the entire sensor across the columns.

Mirror Rows: mirrors the entire sensor across the rows.

Toolbar: Used to display or hide the Main Toolbar. The Toolbar can be toggled on and off by clicking this menu item. When the Toolbar option is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu. When the Toolbar is in effect, its two levels can be relocated (separately) in the Main Window by placing the cursor anywhere on one of them (not on an icon) and dragging. If you place the cursor on an edge of the Toolbar, a two- or four- way arrow will appear, and its shape and size can be changed. The Toolbar option is not affected by the <CTRL> key.

Status Bar: Used to display or hide the Main, Movie, and Real-time Status Bars. These status bars can be toggled on and off by clicking this menu item. If a Graph is the active window, this menu item affects the Main Status Bar. If a Movie window is active, this menu item affects the Movie Status Bar. If a real-time window is active, this menu item affects the real-time Status Bar. When the Status Bar option is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu. The Status Bar is not affected by the <CTRL> key.

Coordinates: Displays the X and Y coordinates in any open movie or real-time window. If the window is in a 3-D view mode, the sensor origin point (0,0) is marked by a vertical black or white line, and the X and Y-axes are not displayed.

For more information about how the View menu commands operate, see "Display Options" under the "Analyzing Pressure Data" section.


Options Menu Set Legend: Places a Raw or Calibrated Legend in the Main Window. The Legend shows the pressure range that corresponds to each of the 13 possible colors in any open movie or real-time window.

A calibrated legend will be available if the current movie or real-time window has been calibrated; otherwise, only a raw legend will be available. All calibrated windows that are open simultaneously will be controlled by one calibrated legend. Likewise, all uncalibrated (raw) movies are controlled by one raw legend. Refer to the ‘System Overview’ section for more detailed information on using the Legend.

Hardware Information: Displays a dialog box that shows which Tekscan hardware is attached to the system and how it is configured. This dialog box tells you which Receiver (VersaTek or Super Receiver) is connected between the handle and the computer, and the number of Handles that are connected. The other information (Address, IRQ Line, and DMA Channel) describes the computer’s internal setup, and is intended primarily for service personnel.

Acquisition Parameters: Displays the ‘Data Acquisition Parameters’ dialog box, which enables you to select the movie recording parameters. You may set the number of frames to record, and either the period (elapsed time between frames) or frequency (frames per second), but not both. The movie duration (in seconds) is calculated by the TireScan software, based on the other values, and displayed below the frequency. If you would like the system to wait for a specific amount of time before recording, enter a value (in seconds) in the ‘Delay Recording’ field (under Start Options).

Note: Allowable ranges for recording parameters are shown in parentheses.

At the bottom of the dialog box is the ‘Noise Threshold’ field, followed by its available range. This threshold is used to filter out unwanted low-level force readings (noise). The software sets measured forces equal to or less than the threshold value to zero.

To use the standard Internal Triggering feature to start recording when the sensor reaches specified pressure or area values, click the check box. The Triggering button to the right of the dialog box become available Clicking this button displays the ‘Triggering’ dialog box, which allows you to ‘trigger’ the software to start and stop recording pressure data based on specified internal events. By default, the ‘Enable Triggering’ option is not checked, and triggering is not in effect. Refer to the ‘Taking a Recording’ section for more information on setting the ‘Data Acquisition Parameters.’

Tekscan offers an optional External Triggering/Synchronizing software package. This package allows the software to receive an external triggering event, as well as to generate a signal synchronized to the recording. Refer to Appendix A for more information on the External Trigger. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the External Synch Pulse.


Set User Preferences: Allows you to customize certain operational features of the system according to your preferences.

You may enable/disable the following options:

General Tab:

Auto Tile: When Auto Tile is checked, and one or two view (real-time or movie) windows are open, the system will automatically tile all open windows (including graphs) when placing a graph. If more than two view windows (or graphs) are open, Auto Tiling has no effect.

Blank Frames Tab:

Auto Remove Blank Frames: If you select "From Beginning of Movie", any blank frames that are in the beginning of your recordings (ie: no force is measured) will be removed automatically. If you select "From End of Movie", any blank frames at the end of your movie will be removed. A frame is considered "blank" by the system if all of the forces on the sensor are below the "Noise Threshold" setting in Acquisition Parameters (Options menu). The frame count in the Movie Status Bar will reflect the change in the number of frames.

Status Bar Tab:

The options under this tab enable you to decide which information will be displayed in the Movie Status Bar. If “Frame Count” is selected, the standard frame count (e.g., “Frame 2 of 5”) will be shown. If “Relative Time (Seconds)” is selected, the elapsed time of the movie will be shown (e.g. “Time 2.5 of 4.0 sec”). If “Absolute Date/Time” is selected, the date and time that the movie was recorded is displayed.

Title Tab:

Show in Title: The "Handle" information, “Sensor/Map” and “Sensitivity” can be displayed in the title bar of any Real-time or Movie windows. By default the title bars will display this information. Uncheck these boxes if you do not want this information displayed. By default, only the Handle option is enabled.

Measurement Units: Displays a dialog box, which allows you to choose the units that will be displayed for length, force, and pressure, and the number of decimal places that will be displayed for force and pressure. The default units are inches for Units of Length, pounds for Force, and PSI for Pressure. The default number of decimal places depends on the units that are selected.

When the cursor is over a Movie or Real-time window, the Main Status Bar displays the sensor row and column numbers that the cursor is currently above. The status bar also displays these coordinates in standard engineering units, such as inches or centimeters. This feature is disabled if ‘cells’ is selected as the Unit of Length in the dialog box. The units and decimal place settings are applied to all Movie and Real-time windows, and Graphs, regardless of which view is currently active. Once you change these settings, the software will remember them when you start a new session or close the application.


In the ‘Measurement Units’ dialog box, you can also select the increment by which the upper and lower limits of the legend will be increased and/or decreased. The allowable increments are 1, 10, 100, 1000, and 10000. Note that if you select an increment other than 1, you may still manually enter any upper or lower limit into the legend limits.

Select Sensor: Displays the ‘Select Sensor’ dialog box, which enables you to designate the sensor and map that are currently installed on your TireScan system. The system needs this information in order to correctly display the data in the real-time window. The dialog box lists the available maps, the number of handles required for that specific map, the system’s available handles, and the type of receiver (Super-Receiver) used with each specific handle. You may select any one of the maps that are listed, but make sure that it is the correct one for the sensor you are using (the map number is the same as the sensor number printed on the actual sensor).

Note: Only one sensor map may be selected for each real- t ime window, but some maps require mult iple handles. Refer to the ‘System Overview’ sect ion for a descript ion of map f i les.

Select the correct handle(s) for the sensor you are using (a check mark will be placed next to your selection). Once the sensor map and handle(s) have been selected once, the software will set them as defaults, and the ‘Select Sensor’ dialog box won’t be displayed at startup. If you change the type of sensor or the handle that you are using, make the appropriate changes using the Select Sensor option.

Settings: Displays the ‘Settings’ dialog box for the currently active movie or real-time window. This dialog box allows you to view the window’s general information, comments, calibration data, and sensitivity setting, all in one place. You may also select ‘Settings’ by clicking the right mouse button with your cursor over a window, and clicking on ‘Settings’. To access the desired information for the window, click on one of the following tabs in the dialog box.

• General: The general information includes the sensor data, such as the sensor type and number of rows and columns, and the movie data, such as the noise threshold and the selected units.

• Comments: This page displays the comments associated with the current window. If you want to make any changes to these comments, click the ‘Change Comments’ button - the ‘Comments’ dialog box will be displayed. Any changes will be displayed immediately. Refer to the ‘Including Comments’ section for more information.

• Calibration: This page displays the calibration status and data for the current window. If the window is calibrated, the calibration data, such as the scale factor and saturation pressure, will be displayed. Depending on the calibration status of the window, you may perform a number of calibration functions using the four buttons at the bottom of this dialog box.

The ‘Calibrate’ button enables you to perform a calibration. The ‘UnCalibrate’ button allows you to remove the calibration data from the window. The ‘Load’ button allows you to load a calibration file into the window, and the ‘Save’ button allows you to save the window’s calibration data as a file. These buttons will be grayed out if they are not available, based on the calibration status of the window. Refer to the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section for more information on calibration.

• Sensitivity: This page displays the sensitivity setting of the current movie or real-time window. If you want to make a change to the sensitivity setting in a real-time window, click the ‘Sensitivity’ button - the ‘Adjust Sensitivity’ dialog box will be displayed. The ‘Sensitivity’ button will be unavailable (grayed out) when a Movie window is active. Any changes will be displayed immediately. Refer to the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section for more information on adjusting the sensitivity.


Movie Menu The Movie menu items and corresponding Toolbar icons control the movie playback functions. The playback menu items and icons control all open movies in unison, regardless of which movie is active. Press the <CTRL> key simultaneously if you want the selected playback option to affect only the active window. Refer to the ‘Taking a Recording/Snapshot’ section for more information on these options.

Play Forward: Plays the recording forward, starting at the current frame.

Play Backward: Plays the recording in reverse, starting at the current frame. To enable ‘Continuous Play’, press the <SHIFT> key, and simultaneously select Play Forward or Play Backward. The movie will play in the desired direction indefinitely, looping back to the first or last frame each time.

Stop: Stops either playback or recording. If a recording is in progress, Stop will cause the software to stop recording the active Real-time window, even if the selected number of movie frames has not yet been recorded. You can also stop recording by pressing the <F4> key. The Stop option is not affected by the <CTRL> key.

Next Frame: Plays the recording forward one frame each time it is clicked.

Previous Frame: Plays the recording in reverse one frame each time it is clicked.

Last Frame: Positions the recording at the end (final frame).

First Frame: Positions the recording at the beginning (first frame).

Record: Used to make a recording (movie). When Record is selected, the software begins recording frames of sensor data as it appears in the current real-time window, using the Acquisition Parameters selected in the Options pull-down menu. You can also begin recording by pressing the <F2> key.

If Triggering is in effect, and Record is selected, recording will not begin until the start trigger event occurs. When data is being recorded,‘(Rec)’ is added to the real-time window title bar, and the window’s status bar displays each frame number as it is recorded. Movies created by the TireScan system are stored as*.fsx files.

Snapshot: Used to make a single-frame recording (movie). When Snapshot is selected, the software records a single frame of sensor data as it appears in the current real-time window. You can also take a snapshot by pressing the <F3> key. When data is being recorded,‘(Rec)’ is added to the real-time window title bar. The only Acquisition Parameters that apply to a Snapshot are ‘Triggering’ and ‘Noise Threshold’. Movies created by the TireScan system are stored as*.fsx files.


Append: Allows you to record additional frames of data at the end of an existing movie. The Append menu item is only available when a Movie window (recording) is open, and will be unavailable (grayed out) if a real-time window cannot be opened. The original recording may be one that was closed and reopened, or one that has just been recorded.

When you select Append (and choose your desired handle), a real-time window is opened (the title bar will say “Append to ...”). The frames of data you record in this real-time window will automatically be added to the end of the previous movie. Refer to the ‘Taking a Recording/Snapshot’ section for more information on using Append mode.

Analysis Menu The Analysis menu option provides all of the tools necessary to analyze the data displayed in the Playback (movie) and Real-time windows. Package A, an optional software add-on package, includes Add Blob, Add Polygons and the Tracking box features. If you have the optional features enabled in your software, corresponding buttons will appear on your tool bar. Refer to the "Analyzing Pressure Data" section for more information on each of these menu items.

Show Panes: Places a box, or ‘pane’, in each open Real-time or Movie window. To place a pane in only the active window, press the <CTRL> key while selecting the Show Panes option. Press the <SHIFT> key while selecting this option to add four panes (quadrants) to each window. The data from each of these four panes can then be displayed, analyzed, and graphed separately from the rest of the window’s pressure data.

Add Box: Allows you to place a box on the Active or Real-time window. The data inside that box can then be displayed, graphed, copied and analyzed separately from the rest of the window’s data. When Add Box is selected, a box symbol is added to the cursor, and a box may then be placed by clicking the cursor at the desired point in a movie or real-time window. You can also add a box by pressing the <CTRL> key and clicking the cursor in an open window, or by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over an active window, and selecting Add Box.

Add Line: Allows you to place a line on the active Movie or Real-time window, which can be used to measure the distance or pressure difference between two points. This line data can then be graphed separately from the rest of the window’s data. When Add Line is selected, a line symbol is added to the cursor, and a line may then be placed by clicking the cursor at the desired point in a movie or real-time window. You can also add a line by pressing the <SHIFT> key and clicking the cursor in an open window, or by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over an active window, and selecting Add Line.

• Package A -- Optional Features includes three features: Add Blob, Add Polygons and the Tracking Box. See Appendix: Additional Analysis Features for more information on these optional features:

o Add Blob: This feature enables you to study a group of loaded sensels separately from the rest of the window.

o Add Polygons: This feature allows you to add a custom-shaped box to a real-time or movie window. o Tracking Box: This feature allows you to add a box to the movie or real-time window that will ‘track,’

or follow, the loaded sensels in the window.


Lock Objects: Locks the relative position of all graphing objects (lines, boxes, blobs or polygons), which have been placed in the movie window. When a window contains multiple graph objects, and the button is depressed, moving on object will also move all other objects in the window so that they retain the same position to the object that was moved.

Objects: Displays the ‘Objects’ dialog box, which can be used to control each tile, box and line that is placed in a Real-time or Movie window. In this dialog box, objects (tiles, boxes or lines) can be added, deleted, changed, saved as an ASCII (text) data file, or saved/loaded as an ‘Object file’. You can also open this dialog box by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over an active window or graph, and selecting Objects.

Properties: Opens the ‘Properties’ dialog, which controls the display attributes of all objects in an active real-time or movie window, or the X- and Y-axes display attributes of an active graph in the Main Window. You can also open this dialog box by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over an active window or graph, and selecting Properties.

If a real-time or movie window is active when you select this option, panes and box options will be displayed in the upper (‘Boxes’) section of the dialog box, and line options will be displayed in the lower (‘Lines’) section. The selected data values are displayed in a small box in the top right corner of each box, or at the midpoint of each line.

If a Graph window is active when you select this option, the graph’s Y-axis display options are shown in the upper (‘Y-axis’ and ‘Y-mode’) section of the dialog, and the X-Axis options shown in the lower section. ‘Load Object File' allows you to load previously saved objects (panes, boxes, and lines) into the current movie or real-time window.

Load Object File: Can also be accessed by clicking the Load Object File button in the "Objects" dialog. When Load Object File is selected, an "Open" dialog is displayed, and "Object Files" (with the *.fbx extension) can be opened. When an object file is loaded into the current window, the objects are placed at their saved coordinates. If the current window is not the same size as the original, the software still attempts to place the objects at the correct coordinates.

Save Object File: Allows you to save the objects (panes, boxes, and lines) from an active real-time or movie window as a file. Clicking the Save Object File button in the ‘Objects’ dialog can also access this file. This option is necessary because, when a real-time window is saved as a movie file, the objects in the window are not saved as part of the file. When Save Object File is selected, a "Save As" dialog is displayed, and the file can be saved as an "Object File", with an *.fbx extension. Objects are saved exactly as they appear in the window, with the same properties and coordinates.

Tools Menu The Tools menu items control the sensor calibration and equilibration functions, as well as the manual sensitivity adjustment for the handle(s). The Tools menu items do not have corresponding Toolbar icons. Refer to the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section for more specific information on each menu item.


Calibration: Opens the ‘Calibration’ dialog box, which enables you to calibrate the sensor using either a linear or a 2-Point Power Law Calibration. You can also access this dialog box by clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab in the Settings dialog box. A calibration can be performed either before or after a recording has been taken, also known as a ‘Movie (Frame) Calibration’. TireScan also allows you to calibrate a "virtual" or "multi-region" sensor, either as a single window or as separate 'tiles'. You can perform both linear and 2-point power law calibrations, for a real-time or movie window, for this virtual sensor.

From the ‘Calibration’ dialog box, you can add, edit, or delete calibration points, as well as manually adjust the handle sensitivity and change the system’s current measurement units. Once a calibration is performed, the dialog box displays a graphic representation of the calculated calibration curve, based on the points you have entered. The resulting calibration can be saved as a file by selecting Save Calibration File.

Dynamic Calibration TireScan: Enables you to perform a dynamic calibration, which is a calibration performed while recording real-time data. To use this feature, select Dynamic calibration from the Tools pull-down menu. This will open the Dynamic Calibration dialog box.

You may enter one or two force values, depending on whether you would like to perform a 1- or 2- point dynamic calibration. Then click the Record button in the dialog to begin recording data. As the system is recording, you must load the sensor, and then click the ‘Force 1’ button at the appropriate time. A calibration point is added using the current frame data. If you wish to add a second calibration point, repeat these steps and click the ‘Force 2’ button. Once the dynamic calibration is complete, a message is displayed telling you which frame(s) were used for calibration.

UnCalibrate: Simply removes the sensor’s calibration data. When this item is selected, a dialog box appears, giving the option of canceling the UnCalibrate operation. UnCalibrate cannot be used to uncalibrate a Movie window, and will only be available when a calibrated Real-time window is open. If you want to recalibrate the sensor during the same testing session, you may either use UnCalibrate to reset the calibration of the current window, or select File>>New Session to get a new Real-time window.

Load Calibration File: Allows you to use the calibration data from a previously saved file for your current Movie or Real-time window. When this item is selected, an ‘Open’ dialog box appears, and you can specify the file name and destination (path) of the calibration file you want to load. Calibration data from calibration files (with the extension *.cal) or from TireScan movies (with the extension *.fsx) may be loaded.

Save Calibration File: Allows you to save your current calibration data (in a movie or real-time window) as a file for future use. When this item is selected, a ‘Save As’ dialog appears, and the calibration file can be saved with the specific file name and destination (path) of your choice. TireScan calibration files must be saved with the extension *.cal.

When a recording is saved, the calibration data used to make the recording is saved with the movie file. If you calibrate a sensor and want to save the data separately for later use, however, you must explicitly save it as a calibration file.

Note: The calibrat ion f i le saves only the calibrat ion data associated with the sensor, and does not include the equi librat ion data (i f an equi librat ion was performed).

Equilibration: Opens the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box, which enables you to equilibrate the sensor, and to save or load equilibration data as a file. TireScan also allows you to equilibrate a "virtual" or "multi-region" sensor, either as a single window or as separate 'tiles'. You can create multiple (up to 10) equilibration points for a sensor (or for a ‘tile’), which may be necessary when you want to equilibrate the sensor at a number of different pressures.

Once an equilibration has been performed, a graphic representation of the pressures in the real-time window (in grayscale) is displayed in the dialog box. This is intended to show the relative high and low spots of the sensor, and the low levels of compensation necessary to ensure uniform results. The resulting equilibration can be saved as a file by selecting Save Equilibration File. If you wish to remove the equilibration data during the same testing session, you may either select File>>New Session, or select UnEquilibrate to reset the equilibration of the current real-time window.


UnEquilibrate: discards the current real-time window’s equilibration data. When this item is selected, a dialog box appears, giving the option of canceling the UnEquilibrate operation. This option may be used if you make a mistake in performing your initial equilibration, or if you want to perform another equilibration without exiting the TireScan program.

Load Equilibration File: allows you to use the equilibration data from a previously saved file for your current real-time window. When this item is selected, an ‘Open’ dialog box appears, and you can specify the file name and destination (path) of the equilibration file you want to load. You can also access this option by clicking on the ‘Load Eq. File’ button in the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box. Only TireScan equilibration files (with the extension *.equ) may be loaded.

Save Equilibration File: Allows you to save your current equilibration data (in a Real-time window) as a file for future use. When this item is selected, a ‘Save As’ dialog box appears, and the equilibration file can be saved with the specific file name and destination (path) of your choice. You can also access this option by clicking on the ‘Save Eq. File’ button in the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box. TireScan equilibration files must be saved with the extension *.equ.

When a recording is saved, the equilibration data used to make the recording is saved with the movie file. If you equilibrate a sensor and want to save the data for later use, however, you must explicitly save it as an equilibration file.

Note: The equi librat ion f i le saves only the equi librat ion data associated with the sensor, and does not include the calibrat ion data (i f a calibrat ion was performed).

Window Menu Cascade: Use this command to arrange multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion.

Tile (Vertically or Horizontally): Use this command to arrange multiple opened windows in a non-overlapped fashion, either vertically (side by side) or horizontally.

Arrange Icons: Use this command to arrange the icons for minimized windows at the bottom of the Main Window. The names of the currently open Real-time, Movie, and Graph windows are listed beneath the Arrange Icons option. A check mark appears next to the name of the active window.

Help Menu Contents: Displays the ‘Table of Contents’ for the Help information.

Search: Displays an index of the available Help topics.

About TireScan: Displays the About TireScan dialog box, which gives some basic information about the Tekscan software.

Technical Support: provides information on how to contact Tekscan for technical assistance.


CALIBRATION AND EQUILIBRATION

NOTE: This sect ion gives a general overview of how to Equi librate and Calibrate using your TireScan system. For a more in-depth discussion of these topics, refer to Equi librat ion & Calibrat ion Practical

Suggest ions.

TireScan is a resistive-based technology. The application of a normal force to an active sensor results in changes in the resistance of each sensing element (sensel) in inverse proportion to the force applied. Calibration is the method by which this digital output is converted to an actual engineering unit, such as PSI or g/cm2. Calibration enables us to compare the output of the same sensor in various environments and allows us to compare calibrated outputs of various sensors.

Some variation exists between individual elements on any given sensor. This variation is acceptable in the majority of applications. The TireScan system provides a method, called Equilibration, by which this source of error can be minimized, if desired. Equilibration is accomplished by applying a highly uniform pressure across the individual sensing elements. Each element within the sensor should produce a uniform output. When this is not the case, the software determines a unique scale factor for that sensel to compensate for the slight variation.

SENSOR PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS

NOTE: This sect ion gives a general overview of Sensor Performance Characterist ics. For a more in-depth discussion of these topics, refer to Equi librat ion & Calibrat ion Practical Suggest ions.

Before effective use can be made of the Equilibration and Calibration features, an understanding of TireScan sensors is important. While the equilibration and calibration functions of the software address the uniformity and average non-linearity of a sensor, many other sensor characteristics can influence the accuracy of the sensor measurements. In addition, the conditions under which the sensor is used can significantly affect its performance.

This section will discuss some of these characteristics. Where applicable, methods for generically addressing these sensor characteristics from a calibration or equilibration standpoint are presented.

Practical Sensor Loading Considerations When calibrating and equilibrating a sensor, you should consider two main points: how the forces or pressures are applied to the sensor, and whether or not the load or pressure is being applied uniformly over the contact area of the sensor. These considerations are very important because the calibration of the sensor will only be as good as the known conditions that were used to calibrate it.

Many applications will require minimal attention to these considerations. However, you should be aware of them when designing your applications for the TireScan system. Incorporate any considerations that apply to your specific application.

Conditioning Sensors Sensors must be exercised by loading them three to five times before they are used (called ‘conditioning’ the sensor). Conditioning helps to lessen the effects of drift and hysteresis, and is required for new sensors, and for sensors that have not been used for a length of time.

For best results, the sensor should be conditioned by loading it to pressures approximately 20% greater than expected during the actual application. The method of loading during this conditioning period should employ material of similar compliance to the actual material that will be used in the application.

Important ! It is essent ial that a sensor be properly ‘condit ioned’ prior to calibrat ion, equi librat ion and use.


Note: for more information, refer to Precondit ioning the Sensor


Repeatability Repeatability is the ability of a device to respond in the same way to a repeatedly applied stimulus. It is necessary to ‘exercise’ a measurement device several times before calibrating it or using it for measurement. The same is true with TireScan sensors. This is done to reduce the amount of change in the sensor response due to repeated loading and unloading.

New sensors, and sensors that have not been used for a length of time, must be loaded three to five times before they are used (called ‘conditioning’ the sensor). Refer to the ‘Conditioning Sensors’ and Preconditioning the Sensor sections for more information.

Important ! It is essent ial that a sensor be properly ‘condit ioned’ prior to use and calibrat ion.

Linearity One of the characteristics that the calibration feature addresses is the non-linearity inherent in the sensor’s (and system’s) response to an applied force or pressure. As with many of the characteristics of the sensor, the linearity is a function of the particular sensor in question. The design of the sensor, the sensitivity range, the interface material, and the loading method all influence the degree of non-linearity.

Note: for more information, refer to Equi librat ion & Calibrat ion Practical Suggest ions

Uniformity A typical TireScan sensor can have more than 2200 individual sensing elements, or ‘sensels’. For many reasons, the individual response of these independent sensels may vary slightly. This uniformity can be measured by applying a known uniform pressure to the entire sensing area of the sensor, or a large portion of the sensing area. The software’s equilibration function can be used to compensate for the variations in individual sensel output.

Note: for more information, refer to the Equi librat ion and Equi librat ion & Calibrat ion Pract ical Suggest ions sect ions.

Hysteresis As with many measurement devices, TireScan sensors experience hysteresis. Hysteresis is the difference in the sensor output response during loading and unloading, at the same applied force. For static forces and applications in which the force is only increased, and not decreased, the effects of hysteresis are minimal. If an application includes load decreases, as well as increases, there may be error introduced by hysteresis that is not accounted for by calibration and equilibration.

Note: for more information, refer to Hysteresis under the General Equi librat ion and Calibrat ion Considerat ions sect ion.

Drift Drift is the change in sensor (and system) output when a constant force is applied over a period of time. Among other things, the drift may be influenced by the sensor design, the sensor sensitivity, the interface material, the applied load, and environmental conditions. It is important to take drift into account when calibrating the sensor, so that its effects can be minimized. The simplest way to accomplish this is to perform the sensor calibration in a time frame similar to that which will be used in the application.

Note: for more information, refer to Durat ion of Load and Dri f t


Temperature Sensitivity The output of the TireScan sensor will vary with temperature. Please refer to the data sheets for the actual temperature coefficient for your sensor type. To account for this thermal coefficient of the sensors, calibrate the sensor at the temperature at which it will be used in the application. If the sensor is being used at different temperatures, a calibration should be performed at each of the temperatures. The calibration associated with each temperature should then be saved as a calibration file (*.cal), and then loaded when using the sensor at that temperature (only).

Note: for more information, refer to Temperature under the Applicat ion Parameters to Mimic for Calibrat ion sect ion.

Sensor Life / Durability The durability of TireScan sensors is generally very good, and in most cases, they are reusable. The actual life of a particular sensor depends on the application in which it is used. Under severe conditions, such as against hard surfaces, sharp edges, non-flat surfaces, sliding surfaces, etc., a sensor may have a very limited life. Rough handling of a sensor will also shorten its useful life. For example, a sensor that is repeatedly installed in a flanged joint will have a shorter life than a sensor installed in the same joint once and used to monitor loads over a prolonged period.

After each installation, visually inspect your sensors for physical damage. Damage to individual cells, rows, or columns do not affect the output of intact elements, and may be accounted for using the software’s Editing feature. Malfunctioning sensor elements will induce biases during the calibration steps and should not be recalibrated.

Note: for more information, refer to Sensor Considerat ions

Shimming Sensors If the thickness of a sensor will change the load path in an application, a shim should be installed so that the load path is not altered. Typically, this is the situation when you want to measure the contact pressure between two flat, parallel rigid members whose mating surface is larger in extent than the active area of the sensor.

It is best to use shim material of the same thickness as the sensor (If necessary, the sensor itself should also be shimmed to uniform thickness.). The standard TireScan sensor thickness is 0.003 inches [0.076 mm]. Custom sensors may be thicker or thinner, depending on their design. Preferably, the shim material should also have a stiffness similar to that of the sensor material (typically polyester or polyimide film). This assures that the sensor-shim layer has a relatively uniform stiffness.

Note: for more information, refer to Shim Stock and Construct ing Sensor Shims

Saturation The saturation pressure is the point at which the sensor output no longer varies with applied pressure. A sensel is saturated when its raw digital output is 255 or greater. These sensels are always displayed as red, regardless of the Legend’s upper limit setting. If a significant number of sensels become saturated during calibration, equilibration, or testing, the calculated average digital output will be incorrect because increases in pressure on the saturated sensels yield no increase in the digital output of those cells.


High Saturat ion (too sensi t i ve)

Mid-Range Saturat ion (even color distribut ion)

Low Saturat ion (not sensi t i ve enough)

If the sensor saturates at a lower pressure than desired, the sensitivity can be adjusted to increase the sensor’s effective range. The saturation value is directly affected by the sensitivity setting; as the sensitivity is increased, the data output range decreases. Refer to the Sensitivity (Gain) Adjustment section for instructions.


Note: The sensi t iv i ty cannot be adjusted i f you have the PC Interface Board (SR-2) hardware conf igurat ion.


Material Compliance Compliant materials tend to “cushion” high points of contact, and “fill in” low points of contact. It acts as a special filter. In general, the effect of inserting compliant material (such as a rubber sheet) between two hard surfaces (such as two metal plates) is to lower the peak pressure areas, increase pressure in low pressure areas, and increase the contact area.

At a “micro level” there is a big difference between two hard materials coming together and a hard material bearing on a soft one, or soft on soft. Two soft materials give more contact area within the active area. Two hard materials give less contact area within the active area. When two hard surfaces touch, there often are three tiny regions with very high contact pressures, and large regions with no contact. The statement from high school geometry can be seen in action: Three points determine a plane. Imagine the deflection of a steel surface compared to the deflection of foam rubber with the same load. You can experiment with different materials and the same load to quantify the difference in contact area.

Note: for more information, refer to Material Compliance under the General Equi librat ion and Calibrat ion Considerat ions sect ion.

Cleaning the Sensor Clean the sensor after each use by wiping it down with a damp rag or cloth with some alcohol. Store the sensors safely and flat (horizontal for large sensor pads) at room temperature in a protective case. Sensors that become wrinkled during storage may show artifacts during measurements. If the tab becomes wrinkled, continuity between handle pins and sensor pads may be lost.

In addition, it is important that the surfaces coming into contact with the sensor are cleaned thoroughly. Deposits and debris from these surfaces can cause damage or inaccurate readings from the sensor.


LOAD APPLICATION GUIDELINES

NOTE: This sect ion gives a general overview of Load Applicat ion Guidelines. For a more in-depth discussion of these topics, refer to Equi librat ion & Calibrat ion Practical Suggest ions.

The following specific guidelines will help you obtain the best equilibration and calibration results possible, and are strongly recommended:

• Apply a calibration load that approximates the load to be applied during system use, using one of the following three types of devices:

o Dead weights - Impractical for higher loads o Comprehensive testing device (such as an MTSTM or InstronTM) - Essential for higher loads o Uniform pressure applicator - Suitable for lower pressures. The most common of these devices is an

equilibration/calibration device, which inflates a rubber diaphragm against the sensor surface. Tekscan has developed equilibration/calibration devices with pressure ranges up to 500 PSI.


Note: A uni form pressure applicator is the only acceptable way to load the sensor for

equi librat ion.

The following image at right is an example of a Tekscan equilibrator (which contains an equilibration/calibration device).

• A material/sensor interface similar to that being tested should be employed during calibration. The influence of the surface compliance of mating surfaces has an effect on the response of the sensor.

• When applying the load for calibration or equilibration, cover as much of the sensor area as possible (the minimum loaded area is 25%). The software does not consider the sensor loaded (and will not start calibrating/ equilibrating) unless at least 1% (3% for equilibration) of the sensels are loaded.

• When applying the load for equilibration, cover the entire sensor area, if possible. The software assumes that the same pressure is applied to each loaded sensel, and any unloaded sensels will not be equilibrated.

• If you exceed the target load for calibration, you must remove and reapply the load. • Avoid loading a large area of the sensor to near saturation when calibrating or equilibrating. If the sensor

saturates at a lower pressure than desired, adjust the sensitivity. • Make certain that no sensels become saturated (raw digital output of 255) during calibration or equilibration.

If there are a significant number of saturated sensels, the calculated average digital output will be incorrect; increases in pressure on the saturated sensels yields no increase in the digital output of those cells.

• To avoid saturating sensels, it is important to clean the surfaces that are in contact with the sensor during the loading process. For example, scale deposits, corrosion or large pieces of dirt will cause the sensels in those areas to be loaded more highly than other areas. In many cases, these point loads will carry a significant portion of the applied force and will saturate at very low applied forces.

Method of Loading During Calibration and Equilibration There are two types of loading that may be employed when calibrating and equilibrating a sensor: Uniform Pressure Loading and Non-Uniform Applied Force Loading. Uniform pressure loading is the only acceptable way to load a sensor for equilibration, and is the preferred method for calibration. However, this method of loading is limited by the user’s ability to apply a uniform load, and is often not practicable. In these cases, non-uniform loading must be utilized.

Note: Regardless of which method of loading is used, best results are achieved by properly condit ioning the sensor prior to calibrat ion/equi librat ion, and accounting for hysteresis, dri f t and temperature

sensi t iv i t y .


Uniform Pressure Loading This loading method requires that the user apply a known uniform pressure to the sensor. This is most easily done (for lower pressures) using an inflatable equilibration/calibration device, which consists of a thin, flexible membrane that is pressurized against the sensor (Tekscan has developed equilibration/calibration devices with pressure ranges up to 500 PSI). For higher pressures, you may have no means of safely and practically applying a known uniform pressure to the sensor. In these cases, reasonably flat and parallel platens can be used to load the sensor to ensure a reasonably even distribution of force over an area. When using an equilibration/calibration device to apply a uniform pressure, there are many things to consider in loading the sensor properly. Some of these are listed below:


• Equilibration/calibration device Material Selection: The type of material used for an equilibration/calibration device will have an impact on how the sensor is loaded. Most equilibration/calibration device materials are thin, flexible and compliant. If the application the sensor is to be used for has mating surfaces that are less compliant, non-uniform applied force loading is the preferred method for calibration. Some equilibration/calibration device-type materials can possess some structural stiffness, which will influence the actual pressure being applied to the sensor, especially at lower pressures.

• Entrapped Air: If the entire sensing area of the sensor is loaded using an equilibration/calibration device-type fixture, the entrapped air between the two layers of the sensor will act as an air bearing. This means that the entrapped air is supporting the applied load and the sensels are not being loaded properly.

There are two methods that can be used to avoid the entrapped air problem. One method is to not load the entire sensing area of the sensor with the equilibration/calibration device. By leaving a sizable area of the sensor unloaded by the equilibration/calibration device, the entrapped air has a place to go during the loading process. The second method involves cutting slits in the sensing area of the sensor (between rows and columns so no leads are touched) so the entrapped air can escape during loading of the sensor. To do this, follow the steps below:

1. Place the sensor on a flat table, and with a razor, cut slightly into each end of the sensor. A small slit, 1-2 mm. in length, is sufficient.

2. Place a very small amount of talcum on the sensor to prevent it from sticking to the equilibration/calibration device fixture. Remove any excess, as it could manifest itself as a peak load area.

3. Run your finger along the sensor to force the air out of the slits you have made.


Non-Uniform Applied Force Loading This loading method does not require the user to apply an absolutely uniform force distribution. This method merely requires that a known force be applied to the sensor in as even a manner as possible. For calibration, the software calculates an average applied pressure based on the area of loaded sensels and the force value entered by the user. This means that care should be taken to ensure the loaded area of the sensor remains constant for all calibration points. It is also important that at least 25% of the sensels be loaded when using this loading method, to ensure that the average applied force calculations are representative of an average sensel.


Reducing Random Noise If there is random low-level noise, consider raising the lower limit on the legend. Adjusting the lower value on the legend will suppress noise and reduce artifacts. Adjustments to the legend change the displayed image, but do not affect the data stored in the movie.

Though raising the noise threshold reduces random noise and artifact, rarely is it a good idea to perform this operation. Once the noise threshold is set, data from sensels with lower digital output is absent from the movie, and cannot be recovered. If it is necessary, you can adjust the noise threshold through Options Acquisition Parameters. The default threshold level is 3, and this setting should be used for almost all measurements. This threshold tells the electronics in the handle to eliminate output from sensels with a raw digital output value of 3 or lower.


The following shows some Random noise wi th a full-scale Raw Digi tal Output set for 0-255

through the legend. Not ice there are random art i facts.

The following shows the same sensor image. Not ice that wi th the legend set for 3-255 there

are no random art i facts.

EQUILIBRATION NOTE: This sect ion gives a general overview of the Equi librat ion process. For a more in-depth

discussion of this topic, refer to Equi librat ion & Calibrat ion Pract ical Suggest ions.

Each sensor is somewhat unique - the process for creating sensors results in some variation. In particular, the distribution of pressure-sensitive ink throughout a sensor is not precisely uniform. In addition, as a sensor is used, certain areas may become less responsive than others. The purpose of the equilibration process is to compensate for these slight differences.

IMPORTANT! Equi librat ion i s opt ional, but i f i t is necessary, i t must be performed before calibrat ion.

Switchable Equilibration Equilibration data and raw sensor data are stored separately by the software. Equilibration can therefore be done before or after a movie has been made, and added to the fsx after the movie is recorded. You can save and load equilibration data while in a real-time window and from within a movie that has an equilibration file. You can also turn the loaded equilibration file on or off. This gives the user the ability to see the effect equilibration has on a movie by choosing to display the fsx data in an unequilibrated or equilibrated mode. One can also load equilibration files into previously recorded movies and save equilibration data as a separate file that can be loaded into real-time windows at any time.


To equilibrate a sensor:

1. Open a real-time window, and select it to make it active.

2. Remove any previous equilibration data by selecting UnEquilibrate from the Tools pull-down menu.

Hint : Before start ing the equi librat ion process, change the Real- t ime display to a 3-D view. Note the irregulari t ies in the detected pressure. Af ter equi librat ion, the

3-D display wi ll be much smoother.

3. Select Equilibration from the Tools pull-down menu. The ‘Equilibration’ dialog box will appear.

4. Apply a uniform pressure to the entire sensor, following the ‘Load Application Guidelines’ in this section. In particular, remember the following notes:

• Pressure must be applied using the

Uniform Pressure Loading method. • You must be able to apply an even

load to perform an equilibration (uniform pressure applicator or compressive device). Therefore, you cannot use dead weights to perform an equilibration.

• When applying the load, cover the entire sensor area, if possible. The

software assumes that the same pressure is applied to each loaded sensel, and any unloaded sensels will not be equilibrated.

• If only a certain area of the sensor is equilibrated, all actual tests must be done using the equilibrated area of the sensor to ensure accuracy.


If you are using an Equilibration/Calibration Device, follow the appropriate guidelines for the device you are using. For TireScan applications, you will want to perform at least 3 equilibration points. The recommended Equilibration point pressure values are 20 PSI for the first point, 40 PSI for the second point, and 60 PSI for the third point. These values can be entered on the Equilibration/Calibration Device. Follow the rest of the instructions below, for each pressure point of the Equilibration process.

5. Click on the Equilibrate-1 button. When the ‘Equilibrating’

dialog box appears (see figure at right), enter the amount of time (in seconds) you want to allow the load to stabilize before the equilibration is performed (enter zero to cancel this delay). The software will remember this ‘wait’ time and save it as the default.

6. Click Start. A timer counts down time remaining (in seconds)

before the equilibration is performed. Once this time has elapsed, the software will begin collecting sensel data and equilibrating the sensor. During this process, a unique scale factor is applied to each sensel’s value to make them uniform.

Note: If no load (less than 3% of sensels loaded) is on the sensor, the equi librat ion process won’t be performed and the message ‘Insuf f icient Area Loaded’

wi ll be displayed. However, i t wi ll automatically begin when a load is sensed.

Once the equilibration process is complete, a graphic representation of the pressures in the real-time window (in grayscale) is displayed in the dialog box. A grayscale legend appears above this, showing the relative pressure ranges, from the ‘cold’ cells (darker) to ‘hot’ cells (lighter).

This figure at left shows the relative high and low spots of the sensor, and the levels of compensation necessary to ensure uniform results.

7. If you would like to add a second equilibration point for the sensor, click the ‘Equilibration-2’ radio button (see image at right), then click the Equilibrate-2 button at the bottom of the dialog box to start the equilibration process. Repeat these steps to add up to 10 equilibration points. Multiple points may be necessary when you want to equilibrate the sensor at a number of different pressures.


Once you have created one or more equilibration points, you can display the data for a specific point by selecting its radio button to the right. The selected point's raw value will be displayed (e.g. "Raw-1: 56") and its graphic equilibration data will be displayed in the window to the left.

8. Click <OK> to close the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box. These pressure values should appear uniform in the real-time window.

Multi-Tile Equilibration TireScan allows you to equilibrate a "virtual" or "multi-region" sensor, either as a single window or as separate 'tiles'. A multi-tile equilibration is performed as described in the 'Equilibration' section, with the following differences:

• When you open the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box (Tools->Equilibration), any tiles are shown as color-coded boxes in the display window. This graphic representation of the sensor shows each tile’s size and position in the overall virtual sensor.

Note: The mult i - t i le opt ions wi ll only be avai lable when a "virtual" or "mult i -region" Map is selected (in Options->Select Sensor).

• You can choose to perform an equilibration on a single tile, or on the entire virtual sensor. To equilibrate the entire virtual sensor, click (to de-select) the ‘Tiles’ check box. The individual ‘tile’ buttons to the right will become unavailable. Click the Equilibrate-1 button to open the ‘Equilibrating’ dialog box and start the equilibration process.

• To equilibrate a single tile, place a check mark in the ‘Tiles’ check box, and select one of the color-coded ‘tile’ buttons that become available to the right. The word ‘tile’ next to each of these buttons will be the same color as its accompanying tile. Click the Equilibrate-1 button - the ‘Equilibrating’ dialog box will open, with instructional text that is the same color as the tile being equilibrated.

Important ! When performing a mult i - t i le equi librat ion using mult iple sensors, ensure that they are all in the same force range.

• Once an equilibration has been performed, the equilibration data (‘Levels’ and ‘Raw’) for whichever tile is selected, or for the entire virtual sensor, will be displayed in the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box. If you performed an equilibration on separate tiles, this text (‘Levels’ and ‘Raw’) will be the same color as its accompanying tile. If you created multiple equilibration points for a single tile or for the entire virtual sensor, you can view the data for a specific point by selecting it to the right (e.g. “Equilibration-2”).

Once a tile has been equilibrated, the word ‘tile’ next to that tile’s button will be displayed entirely in capital letters; before equilibration, it will be entirely in lowercase letters.

Viewing the Equilibration Process When equilibrating, use the 2-D view to clearly see each sensel as a square pixel on your computer screen. If Avg1 (Averaging) or Avg2 (Fixed Area Averaging) is turned on, the granularity of the view is reduced (the view is smoothed out), and it is not possible to distinguish each sensel.

The 2-D view displays the recording in two-dimensional form with the color of each sensel location representing the pressure sensed at that point. This display looks the closest to the actual raw output of the sensor, and individual sensels can be identified. 2-D is the default view.

The following displays the 2-D view:


To follow the effects of equilibration, do the following:

1. Place an analysis box over the entire sensor surface.

2. Right-click on the sensor image, and then click on Properties (the bottom command in the menu list).

3. For box properties, select “Contact Pressure” and then click on the Set button.

This shows the average contact pressure on the sensor in Raw Digital Output.

4. In the equilibration fixture, apply the first equilibration pressure. Many sensors display trapped air when first put into a uniform pressure field. Trapped air appears as a region of low reported pressure that results from an air bubble. Over time, the trapped air will dissipate. It may be advantageous to apply a pressure considerably greater than the equilibration pressure, and wait while the trapped air bleeds out. Then, without allowing the pressure in the equilibration/calibration device to go to zero, reduce the applied pressure to the first equilibration point. Refer to “Calibration Load” and “Low Pressure Application” for more information on Trapped Air in the sensor.


5. From within the software, click on the legend icon on the toolbar. The legend’s units should be set for Raw Digital Output. Initially, the upper and lower limits will be set at the value from the previous time the legend was utilized. Now, adjust the upper and lower limits on the legend to bracket the average Raw Digital Output displayed on the upper right of the box. For example, if a six-point equilibration is to be done at average raw counts of 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, and 240, the lower and upper values could be set to the last and next equilibration values respectively. Thus, for equilibration at a raw count of 40, set the legend’s lower limit to 0 and upper limit to 80.

Comparing Equilibrated and Non-Equilibrated Data To compare the effect of equilibration with non-equilibrated data, record a movie or snapshot with equilibration invoked. Open this movie/snapshot file twice. Then click on one of the displayed screen images to make it the active window. Go into Tools Equilibration. When the equilibration window appears, it should show the equilibration array in shades of gray, and in the upper left corner of the window there should be a checkmark in front of the words “Equilibration Enabled.” Clicking on this checkmark will remove equilibration from the active movie. You now have two views of your movie or snapshot: one equilibrated, and the other non-equilibrated. If these are movie files, the two versions can be played back side-by-side. Analysis boxes can be placed on both versions to compare and graph data.

UnEquilibrating If for any reason you wish to discard the current equilibration data (e.g. to perform another equilibration without exiting the TireScan program), simply select UnEquilibrate from the Tools pull-down menu. If you are in the process of equilibrating a sensor, and wish to reload an equilibration point, do the following:

1. Assuming you are currently in the Tools -> Equilibration dialog, and have already inserted an equilibration point(s), select the equilibration point to be deleted, by clicking the radio button:

2. Next, Click the Delete button below the Equilibration points within the dialog (in the bottom right corner).


3. A dialog prompt opens asking if you really want to delete the specified Equilibration point. Click the Yes button.

Your Equilibration point is deleted, and you can enter a new point, if needed (shown below).

Loading/Saving Equilibration Files When a recording is saved, the equilibration data used to make the recording is saved with the movie file. If you equilibrate a sensor and want to save the data for later use, however, you must explicitly save it as an equilibration file. The equilibration file saves only the equilibration data associated with the sensor, and does not include the calibration data (if a calibration was performed). Equilibration data is recalled when File>>New Recording is selected, but not if the application is closed or File>>New Session is selected. Note that each sensor must be equilibrated individually; so one equilibration file may not be used with multiple sensors.

To save an equilibration file:

1. Open a real-time window, and perform an equilibration.

2. Select Save Equilibration File from the Tools pull-down menu. This option can also be accessed by clicking on the Save Eq. File button in the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box.

Select ing from the Tools menu:

Select ing from the Equi libra t ion dialog:


3. When the ‘Save As’ dialog box appears, specify the file name and destination (path), then click <OK>. TireScan equilibration files must be saved with the extension *.equ.

To load an equilibration file:

1. Open a new real-time window.

2. Select Load Equilibration File from the Tools pull-down menu. This option can also be accessed by clicking on the Load Eq. File button in the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box.

Select ing from the Tools menu:

Select ing from the Equi libra t ion dialog:

3. When the ‘Open’ dialog box appears, specify the file name and destination (path) of the desired equilibration file, then click <OK>. Only TireScan equilibration files (with the extension *.equ) may be loaded.

Note: The sof tware will check the loaded equi librat ion f i le to ensure i t was saved

using the same map f i le as the current real-t ime window.


CALIBRATION

NOTE: This sect ion gives a general overview of Calibrat ion. For a more in-depth discussion of this topic, refer to Equi librat ion & Calibrat ion Pract ical Suggest ions.

The TireScan system enables you to perform two different types of calibration -- linear and 2-point power law -- either before or after a recording has been taken. This section describes how to perform a calibration before recording data; refer to the ‘Movie (Frame) Calibration’ section for instructions on calibrating an existing movie. When you perform a linear calibration, you apply a known load to the sensor. The TireScan software then performs a linear interpolation between zero load and the known calibration load. A linear calibration is the most simple to perform, and is suitable for tests in which the load range is limited. Calibration data is stored with movie (*.fsx) files, or explicitly in calibration (*.cal) files, and is displayed with the header information.

When you perform a 2-point power law calibration, you apply two different known loads to the sensor. The software then performs a power law interpolation based on zero load and the two known calibration loads, using the equation y=axb. A 2-point power law calibration is preferable if measurement loads vary considerably during testing. As a rule of thumb, the applied calibration loads should be approximately 20% and 80% of the expected maximum test load.

When calibrating a sensor, the software calculates an average applied pressure based on the area of loaded sensels and the force value entered by the user. This means that care should be taken to ensure the loaded area of the sensor remains relatively constant for all calibration points. It is also important that at least 25% of the sensels be loaded when using this loading method, to ensure that the average applied force calculations are representative of an average sensel.

IMPORTANT! Sensors must be properly condit ioned and equi librated (i f necessary) prior to calibrat ion and use.

Calibrating the TireScan Sensor When calibrating a TireScan Sensor, it is best to use the tire which is relevant to the trial in question. Since different tires can have different features, such as stiffness, using the same tire used in the trial ensures more accurate results. Before calibrating, make sure you know the exact weight that will be applied to the sensor. Drive the tire onto a scale and take note of the exact weight. Alternately, rolling the tire on a tire machine or loading machine will provide you with the exact load force. This will also ensure an accurate calibration. To calibrate the TireScan sensor, follow the procedure below.

1. Equilibrate the sensor at 3-5 pressures. Trucks will require higher pressures, while cars require lower pressures. Refer to the Equilibrating the TireScan Sensor section for further information.

2. Open a new Real-time window, and select its Title bar to make it active.

3. Take your recording. Roll the tire over the Sensor. When driving over the Sensor, do not brake or accelerate.

Ensure you have free wheel rolling at all times the tire is in contact with the Sensor. This reduces any shear or torque during the trial. Note also that force can vary due to vehicle suspension. You may view an undulating force in the resulting data. This is normal.


4. Open the recording that was taken. The movie window opens on-

screen (shown at right). The pressure values are given in Raw sum. This is because the sensor has not yet been calibrated.

5. Locate the frame of the movie that has the highest Peak load on the

sensor. Take note of the frame number, as you will require this later in the calibration procedure.

6. With the Movie window active, select "Calibration" from the "Tools" pull-down menu. The "Calibration" dialog box will appear. You can also access this dialog box by selecting "Settings" from the "Options" pull down menu, clicking on the "Calibration" tab, then clicking on the Calibrate button.


7. Select the force units you want to use in the calibration. The default force unit is pounds; if you want to use another unit, click on the Units button and make your selection in the "Units of Measure" dialog box.

8. Click the Frame button (shown below left) to open the "Movie Calibration Point" dialog box (shown below right).

Note: The average digi tal output does not vary widely during TireScan trials. For this reason, 2-point calibrat ion should not be used. When a t ire is loaded on the sensor, the contact area

increases, but the average contact pressure does not increase. 2-point calibrat ion is mainly useful in si tuat ions where the average contact pressure varies signi f icant ly .

9. In the "Frame Number" field, enter the movie frame number you identified earlier. The movie’s frame range is displayed in brackets (shown above right). Then in the "Applied Force" field (also shown above right), enter the tire weight you recorded earlier. The selected force units are displayed in brackets. The software will remember this "applied force" and save it as the default.

10. Click OK. The system will use this point to perform a linear calibration for the entire movie. During this

process, the software performs a linear interpolation between zero load and the calibration load.

Note: If no load (less than 1% of sensels loaded) is on the sensor, the calibrat ion process wi ll not be performed and the message "Insuf f icient area loaded in this frame" is displayed.

11. Once the calibration process is complete, a graphic representation of the calculated linear calibration curve is

displayed in the "Calibration" dialog box. To the right of this calibration curve is an accompanying legend that shows the relative pressure levels of all points (0-255 raw) on the curve. The calculated saturation pressure is also displayed in this dialog box.


Review the calibration point data (applied force, Raw Sum, and Number of Loaded Cells) for the point. If any of this data is not satisfactory, highlight the point, and press the Edit button to enter a different applied force (the "Edit Calibration" dialog box is shown below), or press the Delete button to remove the calibration point. If the point is acceptable, click OK.

12. Once you have completed the calibration, check the results by placing the cursor over a loaded Sensel, reading the "Load" reported for that Sensel in the Main Status Bar, then making sure that the value falls into the correct range in the Calibrated Legend (with the Legend's lower limit set to zero).

13. If you want to recalibrate a Movie window at any time,

you must delete any existing calibration point, and then add a new calibration point in the "Calibration" dialog box. The system will not allow you to exit the calibration dialog unless you first add a new point. If you attempt to exit without first adding a new point, the prompt shown at right opens on-screen.

14. You can view the calibration status and data for an

active Movie window at any time by selecting Settings from the "Options" pull-down menu, and clicking on the "Calibration" tab. If the window has been calibrated, the calibration data, such as the scale factor and saturation pressure, will be displayed. Depending on the calibration status of the window, you can also calibrate, load, or save a calibration file from this page. Refer to the description of Settings in the "Main Menu" section for more information.

Note: Refer to the “Loading/Sav ing a Calibrat ion Fi le” sect ion for detai ls on saving

Movie window calibrat ion data as a f i le.


Tare This feature modifies the calibrated data to correct for residual pressure (referred to as the ‘Offset Load’) on the sensor at zero load. This operation is useful if the sensor is under some load for the entire duration of the recording, or if the sensor must be secured in place by hardware which would cause load to be detected by the sensor. The raw data is not affected by the Tare function, but an extra calculation is performed when converting the raw data to calibrated data. Any cells reading raw pressure are set at zero raw before the calibration scale factor is applied.

Note: Tare is recommended only for single point calibra t ion and may increase error when using a mult i -point

calibrat ion.

Note: TireScan can be toggled back and forth between gross weight and net weight by adding or removing the check mark

in the Tools -> Calibrat ion dialog.

Note: Tare must be set before a sensor is calibrated

1. Open a new real-time window, and select it to make it active.

2. Select Calibration from the Tools pull-down menu.

The ‘Calibration’ dialog box appears (shown at right). You can also access the ‘Calibration’ dialog box by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab, then clicking on the Calibrate button.

3. Click the ‘Tare’ button to bring up the ‘Tare’ dialog

box.


4. Select either ‘New’ for a real-time window, or ‘Frame’ (see image below) for a previously recorded movie.

• New: Enter the number of seconds you wish to wait before the software records the Tare. Apply the offset load and click ‘Start.’ The Tare will be applied, and the ‘Tare’ dialog box will display the residual forces that will be corrected by the Tare function.

• Frame: If you have previously recorded a movie and wish to use Tare on the forces visible in a specific frame, click ‘Frame.’ Enter the frame number you

wish to use to set the Tare, and click <OK>. The Tare will be applied, and the ‘Tare’ dialog box will display the residual forces that will be corrected by the Tare function.

5. When you are satisfied with your selections, click <OK> to return to the ‘Calibration’ dialog box. When Tare is in effect, the Status Bar will read, “Net Force”.

6. If you wish to save your Tare information separately from a Calibration file, perform the Tare as described above. Before performing calibration functions, click the ‘Save Cal File’ button. Your Tare will be saved as a *.cal file for use later.

7. To load a saved Tare file (*.cal), click the "Load Cal

File" button in the Calibration dialog box.

Note: If an Offset Load is used for Tare, i t must be applied during the Calibrat ion process.

Note: Removal of the Of fset Load during Calibrat ion or Movie recording will cause

inaccurate data to be recorded.


Linear Calibration 1. Open a new Real-time window, and select it to make it active.

2. Select Calibration from the Tools pull-down menu. The ‘Calibration’ dialog box will

appear. You can also access the ‘Calibration’ dialog box by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab, then clicking on the Calibrate button.

3. Select the force units you want to use in the calibration. The default force unit is

pounds; if you want to use another unit, click on the Units button and make your selection in the ‘Units of Measure’ dialog box.

4. Click the Add button in the ‘Calibration’ dialog box. This will bring up the Calibration Point dialog box.


5. In the ‘Applied Force’ field, enter the known force value in the appropriate units.

6. In the ‘Begin calibrating in ___ seconds’ field, enter the amount of time (in seconds) you want to allow the load to stabilize before the calibration is performed. This value is set to 30 seconds by default; however, TireScan will save any value that you enter as the default (you can enter a zero to cancel the delay).

7. If you want to trigger the start of the calibration process, place a check mark in the 'Start Calibration at’ check box (under ‘Triggering’ at the bottom of the dialog box), and enter values into the force and area fields (in Raw Sum and Cells, respectively). The calibration process will not start until both the force and area values are reached; however, you can enter a zero in either field to disable it (both values are zero by default). If calibration triggering is selected, the calibration timer (in Step 6) will not start counting down until after the trigger event.

8. Apply the calibration load to the sensor, following the guidelines and recommendations of this section. As a general rule, make sure that the calibration load is relatively stable and approximates the load range that will be applied during testing.

9. Click Start. The system will wait for any calibration triggering conditions to be met, and then a timer will count down the time remaining (in seconds) before the calibration is performed. Once this time has elapsed, the software will begin collecting sensel data for the calibration point. During this process, the software performs a linear interpolation between zero load and the calibration load.

Note: If no load (less than 1% of sensels loaded) is on the sensor, the calibrat ion process wi ll not be

performed and the message ‘Insuf f icient Area Loaded’ wi ll be displayed. It will automatically begin when a

load is sensed.

Once the calibration process is complete, a graphic representation of the calculated linear calibration curve is displayed in the ‘Calibration’ dialog box. To the right of this calibration curve is an accompanying legend that shows the relative pressure levels of all points (0-255 raw) on the curve. The calculated saturation pressure is also displayed in this dialog box (refer to the ‘Saturation’ section for more information).

The white line(s) in the calibration dialog window graph represent(s) the average raw output(s) of the calibration point(s).


10. Review the calibration point data (weight entered, Raw Sum, and Number of Loaded Cells). If any of this data is not satisfactory, highlight the point, and click Edit (see image below) to change the entered weight, or Delete to remove the calibration point and start over. If the point is acceptable, click OK.

11. Once you have completed the calibration, check the results by placing the cursor over a loaded sensel, reading the ‘Load’ reported for that sensel in the Main Status Bar, then making sure that the value falls into the correct range in the Calibrated Legend (with the Legend's lower limit set to zero).

12. If you wish to re-calibrate the sensor during the same testing session, you may either

select File>>New Session to get a new Real-time window, or select UnCalibrate to delete the calibration point in the current window.

13. You can view the calibration status and data for an active window at any time by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, and clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab. If the window has been calibrated, the calibration data, such as the scale factor and saturation pressure, will be displayed. Depending on the calibration status of the window, you can also Calibrate, UnCalibrate, or load or save a calibration file from this dialog. Refer to the description of Settings in the ‘Options Menu’ section for more information.

Note: Refer to the ‘Loading/Sav ing a Calibrat ion Fi le’ sect ion for detai ls on saving Real- t ime or movie window calibrat ion data as a f i le.


2-Point Power Law Calibration 1. Open a new real-time window, and select it to make it

active.

2. Select Calibration from the Tools pull-down menu. The ‘Calibration’ dialog box will appear. You can also access the ‘Calibration’ dialog box by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab, then clicking on the Calibrate button.

3. Select the force units you want to use in the calibration. The default force unit is pounds; if you want to use other units, go into Options --> Measurement Units and make your selection in the dialog box that opens.

4. Go into the Tools --> Calibration dialog box. You will see the following:

5. Click the Add button. In the ‘Applied Force’ field, enter the first known force value in the appropriate units.

6. In the ‘Begin calibrating in ___ seconds’ field, enter

the amount of time (in seconds) you want to allow the load to stabilize before the calibration point data is taken. This value is set to 30 seconds by default; however, TireScan will save any value that you enter as the default (you can enter a zero to cancel the delay).

7. If you want to trigger the start of the calibration process, place a check mark in the ‘Start Calibration at’ check box (under ‘Triggering’ at the bottom of the dialog box), and enter values into the force and area fields (in Raw Sum and Cells, respectively).

The calibration process will not start until both the force and area values are reached; however, you can enter a zero in either field to disable it (both values are zero by default). If calibration triggering is selected, the calibration timer (in Step 6) will not start counting down until after the trigger event.

8. Apply the first calibration load to the sensor, following the guidelines and recommendations of this section. As a general rule, make sure that the calibration loads are relatively stable and approximate the load range that will be applied during testing.

9. Click Start. The system will wait for any calibration triggering conditions to be met, and then a timer will count down the time remaining (in seconds) before the calibration is performed. Once this time has elapsed, the software will begin collecting sensel data for the calibration point.

Note: If no load (less than 1% of sensels loaded) is on the sensor, the calibrat ion process won’t be performed and the message ‘Insuf f icient Area Loaded’ wi ll be displayed. It wi ll automatically begin when a

load is sensed.


10. Click the Add button in the ‘Calibration’ dialog box to add a second point. In the ‘Applied Force’ field, enter the second known force value in the appropriate units.

11. In the ‘Begin calibrating in ___ seconds’ field, enter the amount of time (in seconds) you want to allow the load to stabilize before the calibration point data is taken (you can enter a zero to cancel the delay).

12. If you want to trigger the start of the calibration process, place a check mark in the ‘Start Calibration at’ check box (under ‘Triggering’ at the bottom of the dialog box), and enter values into the force and area fields (in Raw Sum and Cells, respectively). You can enter a zero in either field to disable calibration triggering.

13. Apply the second calibration load to the sensor, following the guidelines and recommendations of this section.

Note: It is recommended that you allow the sensor to ‘relax’ for 3-5 t imes the total t ime the sensor has been loaded, before adding the second calibra t ion point .

14. Click Start. The system will wait for any calibration triggering conditions to be met, and then a timer will count down the time remaining (in seconds) before the calibration is performed. Once this time has elapsed, the software will begin collecting sensel data for the second calibration point. The software automatically performs a 2-point power law calibration when a second calibration point is added (a check mark is placed next to the ‘Exponential’ option at the top of the dialog box, to show that this method was used).

If the calibration points are not valid for some reason, the error message ‘2-Point Exponential Curve Calculation Failed’, followed by a more descriptive explanation, will be displayed. If you receive any of these error messages, you should read and follow the entire sensor loading guidelines and considerations in this section, then perform another calibration, ensuring the following:

• The loaded area is constant for the two-calibration points. • The entire load path is through the sensing area of the sensor. • There are not a significant number of saturated sensels during calibration. • The sensor’s average digital output is sufficiently different for the two-calibration points (i.e. enough

difference between the two applied forces).

Note: Following these guidelines should ensure a valid ca librat ion.

Once the calibration process is complete, a graphic representation of the calculated calibration curve is displayed in the ‘Calibration’ dialog box. To the right of this calibration curve is an accompanying legend that shows the relative pressure levels of all points (0-255 raw) on the curve. The calculated saturation pressure is also displayed in this dialog box (refer to the ‘Saturation’ section for more information).

15. Review the calibration point data (weight entered, Raw Sum, and Number of Loaded Cells) for the two points. If any of this data is not satisfactory, highlight the point, and click Edit to change the entered weight, or Delete to remove the calibration point. If both points are acceptable, click <OK>.

16. Once you have completed the calibration, check the results by placing the cursor over a loaded sensel, reading the ‘Load’ reported for that sensel in the Main Status Bar, then making sure that the value falls into the desired range.

17. If you wish to recalibrate the sensor during the same testing session, you may either select File>>New Session to get a new Real-time window, or select UnCalibrate to delete all of the calibration points in the current window.


18. You can view the calibration status and data for an active window at any time by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, and clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab. If the window has been calibrated, the calibration data, such as the scale factor and saturation pressure, will be displayed. Depending on the calibration status of the window, you can also Calibrate, UnCalibrate, or load or save a calibration file from this dialog. Refer to the description of Settings in the ‘Options Menu’ section for more information.

Note: Refer to the ‘Loading/Sav ing a Calibrat ion Fi le’ sect ion for detai ls on saving Real- t ime or Movie window calibrat ion data as a f i le.

Multi-Tile Calibration TireScan allows you to calibrate a "virtual" or "multi-region" sensor, either as a single window or as separate 'tiles'. You can perform both linear and 2-point power law calibrations, for a Real-time or Movie window, for this virtual sensor.

A multi-tile calibration is performed as described in the 'Calibration' section, with the following differences:

1. When you open the ‘Calibration’ dialog box (Tools>>Calibration), you have the option of selecting either ‘Show Curves’ or ‘Show Panes’ in the upper (‘Calibration Curve’ section).

Note: The mult i - t i le opt ions wi ll only be avai lable when a "virtual" or "mult i -region" map is selected (in Options>>Select Sensor).

If you select ‘Show Panes’, a graphic representation of the total sensor is displayed, with each tile a different color to show its size and position in the overall virtual sensor. If you select ‘Show Curves’, the color-coded calibration curve for each tile, or for the entire ‘virtual’ sensor, is displayed in the upper section (after the calibration is performed).

2. In the lower (‘Calibration Points’) section, you may choose to perform a calibration on a single tile, or on the entire virtual sensor. To calibrate a single tile, place a check mark in the ‘Tiles’ check box, and select one of the ‘Tile’ buttons that become available to the right. The word ‘tile’ next to each of these buttons will be the same color as its accompanying tile.

To calibrate an entire virtual sensor, remove the check mark from the ‘Tiles’ check box. The ‘tile’ buttons to the right will become unavailable.

3. Click the ‘Add’ button. The ‘Calibration Point’ dialog box will open, and you will be able to perform a calibration, as described in the previous section. If you are adding a calibration point for a single tile, the ‘Applied Force’ and ‘Calibration Status’ text in this dialog box will be the same color as the tile.

The following application guidelines will help you obtain the best multi-tile calibration results possible, and are strongly recommended. If performing a calibration for multiple tiles:

• When using multiple sensors, ensure that they are all in the same force range. • Calibrate all tiles using the same method (Linear or 2-Point Power Law). • After a 2-point calibration, review the curves and ensure that they all appear similar. If they are

drastically different, recalibrate or replace that specific sensor.

4. Once a calibration has been performed, the calibration data values (‘Saturation Pressure’, ‘Force Unit’, ‘Raw Sum’, and Number of Loaded Cells) for whichever tile is selected, or for the entire virtual sensor, will be displayed in the lower (‘Calibration Points’) section of the dialog box. If you added a calibration point for a single tile, this text will be the same color as its accompanying tile.


Once a tile has been calibrated, the word ‘tile’ next to that tile’s button will be entirely in capital letters; before calibration, it is entirely in lowercase letters.

5. To display the calibration curve and data for the entire virtual sensor, make sure there is no check mark in the ‘Tiles’ check box. Once a calibration has been performed, for either a single tile or the entire sensor, selecting or de-selecting ‘Tiles’ will remove the sensor’s calibration data.

6. Once a calibration has been performed, you can manipulate any of the calibration point(s). If the tiles were calibrated separately, you can change the calibration point(s) for a single tile, separately from the other tiles; including adding, deleting, and editing points, as well as calibrating a movie.

7. A Calibration file can be saved before all tiles have been calibrated. The file must be saved before it is applied to the real-time window. This is useful for virtual maps where multiple sensors are included as one map and each tile represents a separate sensor. Since partial equilibration is also available, this feature allows the user to equilibrate, calibrate, and check each tile/sensor before proceeding to the next tile/sensor, and before any recordings are taken.

UnCalibrating If for any reason you wish to discard the current calibration data (e.g. to recalibrate without exiting the TireScan program), simply select UnCalibrate from the Tools pull-down menu. You can also uncalibrate a window by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab, then clicking on the ‘UnCalibrate’ button.

Loading/Saving Calibration Files When a recording is saved, the calibration data used to make the recording is saved with the movie file. If you calibrate a sensor and want to save the data for later use, however, you must explicitly save it as a calibration file. The calibration file saves only the calibration data associated with the sensor, and does not include the equilibration data (if an equilibration was performed). Calibration data is recalled when File>>New Recording is selected, but not if the application is closed or if File>>New Session is selected. Note that each sensor must be calibrated individually, so calibration files may not be used with multiple sensors. You may generate and save many calibration files for a given sensor and load those files in the future as long as you apply the calibration files to that same physical sensor with which you calibrated and recorded. Many users identify each sensor by marking it with a felt-tip pen: A, B, C, etc. Then they use that identity in the name of the calibration file. Similarly, many users include the calibration force in the name of the calibration file. For example, Sensor B 100 lb. To save a calibration file:

1. Open an un-calibrated movie file, or open a new real-time window, and perform a calibration.


2. Select Save Calibration File from the Tools pull-down menu. You can also access this option by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab, then clicking on the ‘Save’ button.

3. When the ‘Save As’ dialog box appears, specify the file name and destination (path),

then click <OK>. TireScan calibration files must be saved with the extension *.cal. To load a calibration file:

1. Open a movie file, or a new real-time window.

2. Select Load Calibration File from the Tools pull-down menu. You can also access this option by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, clicking on the ‘Calibration’ tab, then clicking on the ‘Load’ button.

Note: If you load a calibrat ion f i le into a calibrated Movie or Real- t ime window, the f i le’s data wi ll replace the window’s previous data.

3. When the ‘Open’ dialog box appears, specify the file name and destination (path) of the desired calibration file, then click <OK>. Only TireScan calibration files (with the extension *.cal) may be loaded.

Note: The sof tware will check the loaded calibrat ion f i le to ensure i t was saved using the same map f i le as the current Real- t ime window.


TAKING A RECORDING/SNAPSHOT TireScan allows you to capture sensor pressure measurements over a period of time through a process called ‘recording’. An TireScan recording is similar to a video recording, since you can rewind your recording, play it and replay it as many times as you wish. With an TireScan recording, you can view the recorded information in a variety of graphical representations. TireScan recordings are also referred to as ‘movies’.

Note: Unlike video recordings, TireScan movies must be explici t ly saved in order to be avai lable for review in future sessions.

ABOUT DATA ACQUISITION PARAMETERS Before you take a recording, you should set the recording parameters to values appropriate for your test dynamics and your computer system capacity. Later in this section you will be given step-by-step instructions for changing recording parameters. First we introduce you to some general information about recording parameters.

When a recording is made, the recorded information is stored in your computer’s memory (RAM) until it is written to disk. It is not written to disk until you explicitly save the recording. The size of your recording is limited by the amount of available RAM. The TireScan software checks how much RAM is available and lets you know the maximum size (in frames) available for your recording when you are setting recording parameters. There are a number of ways to free up more RAM for recording, if necessary, such as closing all other applications.

The recording parameters available to you are:

• Frames to Record: the total number of frames to be recorded • Frequency: the number of frames that will be recorded each second (frames/second) • Period: the amount of time between frames (seconds/frame). Period is related to Frequency by the following

relationship:

Period = 1 / Frequency

• Duration: the length of time (seconds) that a recording will take to complete (the first frame is recorded at time=0). The duration cannot be entered by the user; it is calculated by the software, based on the other three parameters.

Three of these parameters have the following mathematical relationship:

(Frequency * Duration) + 1 = Frames to Record

When setting the movie recording (data acquisition) parameters, you will want to set frequency and duration based upon the period of time of interest and the rate at which pressures change. You may have to make a trade-off between total movie duration and frame rate based on memory availability.

Note: The maximum allowable recording frequency is 127 frames/second.


SETTING THE RECORDING (DATA ACQUISITION) PARAMETERS 1. Click on Options in the Menu Bar. The Options pull-down menu will be displayed.

2. Click on Acquisition Parameters in the pull-down menu. The ‘Data Acquisition

Parameters’ dialog box will be displayed, as shown below.

3. Enter the number of frames that you wish to record in the Frames to Record field. The default is set for 100 frames when you initially enter the dialog.

• Enter either the Period or the Frequency in the appropriate field. When you change either one of these parameters, the other parameter will automatically change (after you exit that field) to maintain the mathematical relationship. The Duration (in seconds) is automatically re-calculated by the software each time to Frame to Record, Period, or Frequency is changed.

• Set the appropriate Start Options for your recording. If you would like the system to wait for a specific amount of time before recording, enter a value (in seconds) in the ‘Delay Recording’ field. By default, this value will be zero.

If you want to trigger the recording to start or stop based on an event(s), refer to the “Triggering a Recording” section for instructions. The time delay will be counted down before any triggering options are considered by the program.

4. Review the values in each field and adjust as necessary. When you are satisfied with the values, click <OK>. These recording parameter settings will remain in effect until explicitly changed (even if you close the application), or until the ‘Default’ button is clicked. Clicking ‘Default’ will set all the Data Acquisition Parameters to their default values.

More about Data Acquisition Parameters

In parentheses next to each field in the Data Acquisition Parameters dialog is the range of acceptable values for that field. The allowable ranges for the Period and Frequency are constant, but the range for Frames to Record change. This range resembles 1 - NMAX (where NMAX is a number). NMAX is the maximum number of frames that can be recorded based on the computer system’s resources (especially available RAM) and the hardware attached to the system (e.g. number of handles). You can increase the available N, which generally means closing other running applications.


If you enter a value that exceeds NMAX, an error message will appear, prompting you to enter an integer in the specified range. You will not be allowed to leave the field until a valid value is entered. The dialog can only be closed with invalid numbers in a field by clicking on <Cancel>.

NOISE REDUCTION After a period of use or in the presence of EMI, a sensor may indicate noise as low-level pressure. To reduce the effect of such noise on your recordings, you can set a noise threshold. Digital output values that are equal to or below this threshold are set to zero by the software, thereby filtering out unwanted low level force readings (noise). See Data Acquisition Parameters under ‘Setting the Recording Parameters’.

To set up the system for noise reduction:

1. Select Acquisition Parameters from the Options pull-down menu.

2. Enter a value between 0 and 255 (raw units) in the Noise Threshold field at the bottom of the “Data Acquisition Parameters” dialog. The default value is 3.

3. When you are satisfied with the value you have entered, click <OK>.

Note: An alternat ive way to mask noise that appears in the display is to raise the minimum value in the Legend (see image at lef t). This does not eliminate the noise from the

recording; however, i t only keeps i t from being displayed.

TRIGGERING A RECORDING The TireScan software provides great flexibility in ‘triggering’ when to start and stop recording pressure data. The triggering option enables the user to start and stop recording based on a number different events. These events include sensor load, sensor contact area, or a pre-defined

number of frames. With the optional external trigger/synch package, the software can also be set up to start and stop recording based on an external signal. See Appendix: Using the External Trigger/Trig-Synch Box for more information on triggering. See Appendix B for more information about Synchronizing External Devices. See Appendix: Video Capture and Playback Package for more information about Video Features.


The software also provides the ability to record groups of frames (as a single movie) using multiple start and stop events, or to retrieve a specified number of frames previous to the start trigger event. These options are called ‘Group Recordings’ and ‘Pre-Triggering’, respectively. Triggering is disabled by default, and data recording will begin when Record is selected or the Start button is pressed on the sensor handle, and will end when Stop is selected, or the specified number of frames have been collected.

Note: If more than one Real- t ime window is open, the force and area values set for t riggering are the sum of the total values for all windows.

To access the internal triggering option:

1. Select Acquisition Parameters from the Options pull-down menu.

2. Click in the ‘Enable Triggering’ box on the left side of the dialog box. The Triggering button, on the right side of the dialog box, will become available.


3. Click on the Triggering button to open the ‘Triggering’ dialog box (shown below).

To set the ‘start triggering’ event:

1. In the ‘Start Triggering’ area, select ‘First Contact’ as the Start Method. Selecting ‘None’ will disable triggering. The ‘Force’ and ‘Area’ fields become available.

Note: You may select any combinat ion of start and stop trigger events

2. Enter the force and contact area on the sensor at which you want recording to begin. When the load and contact area on the sensor both reach or exceed these thresholds, the software will start recording. You should enter small values in these fields (e.g. 1 lb. and 0.25 in2), to ensure that an actual event, and not noise, actually triggers the recording. To disable triggering for either force or area, set its value to 0.

Hint : The triggering force and area are not af fected by the Legend’s lower limit set t ing. Therefore, triggering may occur even though no pressures are visible in the Real- t ime window.


3. If a calibration has been performed on the real-time window, you have the option of setting the force units to raw digital units instead of using the calibration units. To set the units to raw, click in the ‘Set Force in Raw Sum’ check box above the ‘Start Triggering’ area. If a calibration has not been performed, this check box will be grayed out, and raw units must be used.

4. Once recording is initiated by the user (by

selecting Record or Snapshot from the Main Menu or Tool bar), pressure data collection will not start until the start trigger event occurs. If no frames of data have been collected (i.e. no trigger event was received), and recording is stopped, the system will revert to real-time mode.

5. The recording will stop when specified by the ‘Stop

Triggering’ event selections. If you wish to stop recording manually, select Stop from the Movie menu, click on the Stop icon in the Tool bar, or press the <F4> key on your keyboard.

To set the ‘stop triggering’ events:

1. In the ‘Stop Triggering’ area, select ‘Frame count’ as the Stop Method.


2. If you select Frame count as the Stop Method, the ‘Stop frame count’ field will become available. Enter the number of frames you want to record (in this field); the software will stop recording when this number of frames has been collected.

Note: The number of frames that you enter as the ‘Stop frame count’ must be less than the ‘Frames to Record’ that are selected in the Acquisi t ion Parameters (Opt ions menu).

3. If you select Last contact as the Stop Method, the ‘Force’ and ‘Area’ fields become available.

4. Enter the force and contact area on the

sensor at which you want recording to end. When the load and contact area on the sensor both reach or drop below these thresholds, the software will stop recording.

To disable ‘stop triggering’ for either force or area, set its value to 0. The units for the area and force settings will be the same as those used to start triggering.

5. If you wish to stop recording manually, before the stop trigger event occurs, select Stop from the Movie pull-down menu, click on the Stop icon in the Tool bar, or press the <F4> key on your keyboard.


Note: The number of frames that you enter as the ‘Stop Frame Count’ is limited by the ‘Frames to Record’ that are selected in the Acquisi t ion Parameters.

Hint : Your recording may include fewer frames than expected i f ei ther of the ‘Remove Blank Frames’ opt ions, in ‘Set User Preferences’ (Options menu), are selected.

GROUP RECORDINGS It is possible to record groups of frames as a single movie (called ‘Group Recordings’) using multiple start and stop events. When this is done, the software will continue to start and stop recording based on the selected triggering events until either the number of frames specified in the ‘Frames to Record’ field of the Acquisition Parameters (Options menu) have been recorded, or the user manually stops the recording.

Note: ‘Pre-Triggering’ and ‘Enable group recordings’ cannot be in ef fect at the same t ime. One opt ion will be grayed out when the other is selected.

To set up a group recording:

1. Set the Stop and Start Triggering options as desired.

2. Place a check mark in the ‘Enable group

recordings’ box above the ‘Stop Triggering’ area in the dialog box, then click <OK>.

Note: All frames within a group are recorded at the same frequency, which is def ined in the

Acquisi t ion Parameters dialog box.

Note: When you view a movie that has mult iple groups of frames, the t ime axis in the graph display wi ll not show the correct t imes. It treats the frames as i f they all occurred in sequence; however, this does not include the t ime in which the sof tware was wai t ing for a

trigger event .

PRE-TRIGGERING The Pre-Triggering option enables you to retrieve frames of pressure data that precede the start trigger event. These frames are then included at the beginning of the recording. This option is often used in high-speed applications, in which the trigger events occur very rapidly, and ‘pre-triggering’ ensures that no pressure data is missed.


To set up pre-triggering:

1. Access the Triggering options, as described in "Triggering a Recording". Set up your "Start Triggering" options. In the ‘Pre-Triggering’ area, place a check mark in the ‘Enable pre-triggering’ box to select this option.

Note: ‘Pre-Triggering’ and ‘Enable group recordings’ cannot be in ef fect at the same

t ime. One opt ion will be grayed out when the other is selected.

2. In the ‘Pre-triggering frames’ field, enter the number of frames (preceding the start trigger event) that you want to retrieve. The number of frames entered is limited only by the ‘Frames to Record’ that are selected in the Acquisition Parameters (Options menu).

Hint : Your recording may include fewer frames than expected i f ei ther of the ‘Remove Blank Frames’ opt ions, in ‘Set User Preferences’ (Options menu), are selected.

3. Click OK to apply your selection.

TAKING A RECORDING Once all of the recording parameters have been set, you are ready to record sensor pressure data.

To initiate a recording:

1. Open a new real-time window. Refer to the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section, and perform a sensitivity adjustment, equilibration, and/or calibration, if necessary.

2. Select Acquisition Parameters from the Options pull-down menu, and ensure that the recording parameters are set correctly for your application. Also ensure any triggering options are set correctly.

3. If you wish to remove blank frames at either the beginning or end of the recording, select Set User Preferences from the Options pull-down menu, and place a check mark next to ‘From Beginning of Movie’ or ‘From End of Movie’, respectively.


Note: A frame is considered blank by the system i f all of the forces on the sensor are below the Noise Threshold set t ing in Acquisi t ion Parameters (Options menu).

4. Load the sensor exactly as specified in the ‘Calibration and Equilibration’ section.

5. Select Record or Snapshot from the Movie pull-down menu, or click the corresponding icon on the Toolbar, to start recording pressure data. You can also begin recording by pressing the <F2> key (or <F3> to take a snapshot) on your keyboard.

Note: The Snapshot opt ion records a single-frame movie.

Another way to start a recording is by pressing the long blue button on the top of your sensor handle (referred to as ‘Remote Recording’).

Note: Remote recording control is an opt ion in the TireScan system. It may not be avai lable on your system.

When recording is in progress, ‘(Rec)’ is added to the real-time window’s title bar, and the Real-time Status Bar displays ‘Rec. Frame X of Y’ (where X is the current frame number and Y is the total number of frames to be recorded).

6. When the desired number of frames has been collected (if triggering is not in effect), select Stop from the Movie pull-down menu or click the Stop icon in the Tool bar, to stop recording data.

As soon as recording is completed, the real-time window becomes a Movie window. Now you have the recording available, and are ready to review the recorded data. Refer to the ‘Reviewing a Movie’ section.

7. Once you have completed recording, you can select Append from the Movie menu to add additional frames of data to the end of the movie (refer to "Append Mode" for more information).

8. If you want to save the movie as a file, select Save Movie from the File pull-down menu, and save the

movie under the filename and directory of your choice. Ti reScan movie files must have the extension *.fsx.


Note: The View set t ings (e.g. window posi t ion, zoom %, rotat ion, f ixed area averaging, COF, etc.), as well as the sensi t iv i ty set t ing and calibrat ion data, are all saved with the movie f i le.

APPEND MODE TireScan allows you to append, or add additional frames of data at the end of an existing movie, using the Append feature. The Append option is only available when a Movie window (recording) is open. The original recording may be one that was closed and reopened, or one that has just been taken.

To append data to an existing movie:

1. Take a recording, or open a previously recorded movie.

2. Select Append from the Movie pull-down menu. The 'Select Sensor' dialog will be displayed. Under "Available Handles", you may select which handle to use for the appended real-time window. The "Available Maps" will be grayed out, because the appended data must use the same map as the initial movie.

Once you select a handle, a real-time window will automatically be opened (the title bar will say “Append to...”).

The Append menu i tem will be unavai lable (grayed out) i f a real- t ime window cannot be opened.

3. Take a recording. As soon as you finish recording, the frames of data you have recorded will automatically be added to the end of the existing movie. The frame count displayed in the movie’s status bar will reflect the additional frames.

Calibration Notes:

• The ‘Append’ real-time window will use the same calibration data as the original movie window (if it has been calibrated). The appended frames cannot be calibrated separately from the original recording.

• When an ‘Append’ real-time window is open, the original movie window cannot be calibrated (the Calibration and Load Calibration File menu items are grayed out).


Equilibration Notes:

• The ‘Append’ Real-time window can be equilibrated separately from the original movie window; however, this is not recommended, since the final (appended) movie will use two sets of equilibration data.

• If a movie has been recorded, and has not been closed and reopened, any appended frames will use the equilibration data from that movie window. If the movie has been closed and reopened, any appended frames will use the equilibration data from the last open Real-time window, if there was one.

INCLUDING COMMENTS The Comments option allows you to view, add, and edit the contents of the comment fields associated with the current active Movie or Real-time window. The comment fields can be filled in before a recording is taken (i.e. in a real-time window), between recording and saving, or after saving. These comment fields can be useful for recording information about a particular series of tests, such as the test date and the technician.

The ‘Comments’ dialog box is accessed by selecting Comments from the Edit pull-down menu, or clicking on the Comments icon in the Tool bar. You can also view the comments for an active window by selecting Settings from the Options pull-down menu, and clicking on the ‘Comments’ tab. Click on the ‘Change Comments’ button on to display the ‘Comments’ dialog box.

Note: The t i t le of each of the spaces in the Comments dia log box is referred to as a ‘f ield name’, and the entered information is referred to as a ‘f ield entry’.

If a Movie window is active, you may enter information in each field, but cannot change the field names. Once comments have been added or altered in a Movie, the recording must be saved again in order to save these comment changes. If the field entries are changed in a newly recorded movie, all other newly recorded movies will automatically be updated with the information entered in these fields (information under the ‘comments’ field is not transferred between movies).

If a real-time window is active, you may enter information in each field, and also add, delete, and change the field names. Once comments are changed in a real-time window, they will be remembered until New Session is selected from the File menu, or the application is closed. If this real-time window is recorded and saved as a movie, the window’s comments will also be saved.

To edit a field name:

1. With a real-time window as the active view, select Comments from the Edit pull-down menu, or click on the Comments icon in the Tool bar. The ‘Comments’ dialog box will be opened.


2. Click on the Change Fields button to access the ‘Change Fields’ dialog box (shown at right), which allows you to add, delete and change field names.

3. In the ‘Field Name List’, select (highlight) the field name you want to edit (only one may be selected at a time). The currently highlighted field will be displayed in the edit field (under ‘Field Name’) at the bottom of the dialog box.

4. Use the edit buttons to edit the currently highlighted field:

• Add: adds a new field name. Type in the new field name under ‘Field Name’. • Delete: removes the highlighted field name • Delete All: removes all field names • Move Up: moves the currently highlighted field up one row. • Move Dn: moves the currently highlighted field down one row.

5. When you are satisfied with the changes, click <OK>. The changes will be remembered across sessions.

REVIEWING A MOVIE Once you have made a movie, it is available for your review. Your movie consists of a certain number of frames of captured pressure data. This section will review the operations you can perform, once you have captured your movie.

The playback options control all open movie windows (and corresponding graphs) in unison, regardless of which movie is active. Press <CTRL> if you want the selected playback option to affect only the active window. If a movie window is ‘Paused’, it will not respond to the playback commands.

The next section (‘Analyzing Pressure Data’) describes how to interpret the pressure information in a recording or Real-time window.


To play back a recording:

Either record a current Real-time window, or oad an TireScan movie file (with extension *.fsx). Play the movie using the Movie pull-down menu items, or the corresponding Toolbar icons:

• First Frame: positions the recording at the beginning (first frame). • Play Backward: plays the recording in reverse, starting at the current frame. • Previous Frame: plays the movie in reverse one frame each time it is clicked. • Stop: stops playing the recording. • Next Frame: plays the movie forward one frame each time it is clicked. • Play Forward: plays the recording forward, starting at the current frame. • Last Frame: positions the recording at the end (final frame). • Record: Starts Recording the movie. • Snapshot: Takes a single frame recording. • Play Speed: adjusts the speed at which the recording is played back. You can choose from one of the following

speeds: Slowest, Medium Slow, Normal (default), Medium Fast, and Fastest. The play speed can be adjusted either before or during movie playback.

• Continuous Play: To enable Continuous Play, press the <SHIFT> key, and simultaneously select Play Forward or Play Backward. The movie will play in the desired direction indefinitely, looping back to the first or last frame each time.

Note that the Play Speed opt ion has a Toolbar icon (and no pull-down menu i tem), and that the <CTRL> key does not af fect the Play Speed opt ion.

LINKING A PHOTO TO A MOVIE FRAME The Link Photo feature allows you to open a photo file and link it to any frame of a Tekscan (*.fsx) movie. Since the photo is linked to a frame within the movie, it becomes possible to associate one or several photos to a single movie. The amount of photos is dependant only on the number of frames available for the movie. Conversely, you can only associate one photo per frame. You cannot have multiple photos linked to a single frame. The following image file formats are supported: *.bmp;*.jpg;*.gif;*.tif;*.pcx;*.tga.

Note: The “Photo Link” opt ion is only avai lable i f a movie is open within the Tekscan sof tware. If there is no open movie, the “Link Photo” opt ion is grayed out and unavai lable.

The following highlights some benefits from using this feature:

• Procedure documentation is enhanced for all or any part of a movie. You can link several photos to a single movie, thereby documenting each step of a given procedure.

• Create a visual catalog for your movies. Once a photo is associated to a movie frame, you can instantly recognize when or why the movie was recorded by viewing the linked photo.

• If you have several different applications for your Tekscan system, this feature can help you associate an application to a movie.

Associating a Photo to a Movie Frame

Follow the steps below to associate a photo to a movie frame:

1. Open the movie for which you would like the photo associated.

2. Advance the movie to the frame location for which you would like the photo associated. You must select a frame for your movie. If you do not, the photo is automatically associated with frame 1.


3. Click the Photo Link icon on the toolbar, or go to File -> Link Photo.

4. The “Open” dialog displays, where you can select a photo file from your hard drive. Locate the appropriate file, highlight it, and click Open.

5. The photo file opens and snaps to the right edge of the movie window. Only one photo can be linked to each frame of the movie. If you attempt to link a photo to a frame which already has a linked photo, the following message opens on-screen asking if you would like to overwrite the existing photo with the new photo:

When there is only one photo linked to the frame of a movie, removing it causes the following warning message to appear on-screen:


Toolbar and Status Bar Options

When a photo is linked to the frame of a movie, the following toolbar and status bar options are available from the top and bottom of the photo window, respectively:

• Select Photo: This option lists all photos that are linked to the current movie. Clicking on the drop-down arrow allows you to select from any of these linked photos. When a photo is selected, the movie automatically jumps to the corresponding linked frame.

• Add Photo: Allows you to add a photo and link it to a movie frame. • Remove Current Photo: Allows you to remove the currently displayed photo, thereby removing its link to the

movie’s frame. • Copy Photo: This command copies the photo to the windows clipboard. You can then paste the photo to any

other application that supports photo files, such as Microsoft Word or Excel. • Select Size (Zoom): Allows you to quickly select from a number of preset zoom factors. Options are 25%,

33%, 50%, 75%, 100% and Fit to Window. These scale factors are relative to the original photo size. You can also drag from the bottom-right edge of the window to expand or contract the photo and photo window, while maintaining the photo’s aspect ratio. Note: the photo’s current scale is also displayed as a percentage within the middle of the status bar.

Movie Playback

During movie playback, when one photo is linked to a movie, the photo is continually displayed for the entire duration of the movie.

If more than one photo is linked to the movie, when the movie is played, the photo switches to the next photo at the movie frame for which the photo is linked. For example, if you associate image1 to frame 1 and image2 to frame 10, when the movie plays from the beginning, image1 is displayed until the movie reaches frame 10. When the movie reaches frame 10, image2 is displayed until it reaches another frame for which a photo is associated, or until the end of the movie if no other photos are linked to the movie.

Smart Docking

By default, the photo is docked to the right side of the movie window (called “Smart Docking”). When you drag the movie around the screen (by clicking on the Title Bar of the movie and dragging with your mouse), the photo window moves with the movie. This helps you identify photo windows in situations where you have several movie and photo windows open on-screen at once.

Conversely, you can move the photo window independently of the movie window by clicking and dragging on the photo window’s Title Bar. The reason for this is so that you can dock the photo window to a different side of the movie window. If, for example, you want the photo to dock to the left side of the movie window instead of the right, you can click and drag the photo window’s title bar and move the photo window to the right side of the movie window. When you then move the movie window around the screen, the photo window automatically docks to the left side of the movie window.

If you prefer to unhinge the photo window entirely so that the movie window moves independently from the photo window, right click and select Disable smart docking from the context menu (see image below). You can now move both windows independently of one another.

Copying Linked Photos

Using the Copy Photo command located as an icon on the toolbar, you can copy any photo to the windows clipboard. The copy can then be pasted to any other application that supports photo files, such as Microsoft Word or Excel.


When you copy and paste the photo in this manner, the photo is always displayed at its original photo size. If you want to keep the photo’s size the same as what you see on-screen, right-click over the photo window. From the context menu, select Copy Photo (Current View Size). When the photo is pasted into other programs, the size will remain consistent with the photo’s current view displayed within the Tekscan software.

Missing Photo Links

When a photo is linked to a movie frame, there is a connection that is made between the photo file location and the movie. If the photo is moved, this connection is broken. When this happens, your photo is no longer displayed when the movie is opened (see image at right).

To correct this situation, first remove the file using the Remove Current Photo icon on the toolbar, and then link the photo once again by clicking the Add Photo icon on the toolbar. When the “Open” dialog is displayed, select the new location for the photo; where the photo was moved. The photo is visible once again.

Printing the Movie Frame and Photo

To print the photo without the movie, first select the photo window by clicking the photo window’s Title Bar. It will turn blue. Then go to File -> Print. The Photo prints out along with the Tekscan software version, Frame number to which the photo is associated, and full path to the file’s location on your hard drive (see image below).

If you would like to print both the movie and photo window at the same time, first select the movie window by clicking the movie window’s Title Bar. It will turn blue. Then go to File -> Print Setup. Ensure the “Photo” checkbox has a checkmark located in it (see image below). This is checked by default.

Click OK to close this dialog box. Then go to File -> Print. Both the movie frame and photo are printed at the same time.


ANALYZING PRESSURE DATA As you review real-time or recorded (Movie) pressure data, you will want to make use of the many analysis tools that TireScan provides. The main analysis options are: Display, Copy, Objects, Graphs, and Save ASCII. Each of these choices provides you with a number of ways of presenting the data, each of which allows you to focus on specific aspects of the contact pressure. The following sections describe how to best utilize these analysis options for your application.

DISPLAY OPTIONS The following TireScan display options are essential in analyzing pressure data: 2-D and 3-D Views, Averaging, Fixed Area Averaging, Movie Averaging, Movie Contact Averaging, COF (Center of Force -- Optional), COF Trajectory (Optional), Max Area Frame, and Peak.

Note that Movie Averaging, Movie Contact Averaging, Max Area Frame and Peak are not avai lable in Real- t ime mode.

The following displays the main "Views" sections, found on the lower toolbar:

Note: When any of these View opt ions is selected, i t af fects all open windows. To apply the selected opt ion to only the act ive window, press the "Ctrl" key and select the opt ion simultaneously.

Note: Any View menu i tems that are in ef fect are reset to the default when Fi le -> New Session is selected. They are saved when the

program is closed and reopened, or Fi le ->New Recording is selected.

2-D displays the recording in two-dimensional form with the color of each sensel location representing the pressure sensed at that point on the sensor (see image at right). This display looks the closest to the actual raw output of the sensor, and individual sensels can be identified. 2-D is the default view.


2-D Contours: displays the recording as a two-dimensional, contoured image (see image at right). The sharp corners of the sensor output are smoothed, making the pressure boundaries easier to discern. 3-D Wireframe displays the recording as a three-dimensional image, in which higher pressures are shown as peaks (see image below). The relative peaks provide visual insight into the gradients within each color band. ‘Wireframe’ means that the image is not a solid image, and is represented by a series of interconnected lines.

3-D Contours displays the recording as a three-dimensional image, in which higher pressures are shown as solid (contoured) peaks (see image at right). The 3-D Contours image will look similar to the 3-D Wireframe image, except that the image will be represented as a solid object. This display can often provide a view of complex pressure data that is easier to comprehend than the Wireframe image. 3-D Reverse displays the recording as a three-dimensional image, in which higher pressures are shown as inverse peaks (see image at left). The 3-D Reverse image is simply an inverted, or reversed, 3-D Contour image. 3-D Reverse is especially useful for viewing the exact footprint of the applied force. The 3-D displays are especially useful in comparing pressure areas that are above the maximum pressure setting on the Legend. In the 2-D displays, all pressures above the maximum pressure setting are shown as red, and cannot be distinguished from each other; in 3-D Contour, Wireframe, and Reverse modes, pressures are displayed as peaks, and relative pressure differences are readily apparent. As you can see in the two figures below, the 2-D display shows where there are areas of high pressure, but the 3-D display gives a much clearer view of exactly how high the pressures are at those points.

When using a "3-D" view, a separate "rotate" function is available. Moving your cursor over the screen, you will notice the cursor changes to a "hand" icon. Left-clicking your mouse will grab the 3-D image and you can then rotate the display in the direction of your choice by navigating with your mouse.

Note that the bot tom plane of the image is not avai lable, and rotat ing the image past this point wi ll f lip the image to show the next avai lable plane. The arrow keys on the keyboard can also be

used to shi f t the image incrementally in any direct ion.


Averaging (AVG1) displays the image with each cell’s pressure value modified to reflect the value of neighboring cells. This results in a smoother image. As an example, in the group of nine cells shown below, the averaged pressure value of "X" is calculated using the following equation:

Where the load recorded in each cell (A-G) is used to calculate the averaged pressure in cell "X". Note that if cell "X" is at the edge of the sensor, the values of the neighboring cells that are not loaded are not used in the calculation.

Fixed Area Averaging (AVG2) is very similar to the Averaging option, but calculates the cell’s pressure value in a slightly different manner, which does not increase the total contact area in the display. As an example, in the group of nine cells shown below, the averaged pressure value of "X" is calculated using the following equation:

The denominator is reduced to reflect the "weight" of the cells with zero load in the equation. For example, if cell "A" is zero, the denominator is reduced by half. If "D" is zero, the denominator is reduced by one. If "X" is zero, the denominator is reduced by two.


The following images show the difference between Averaging (Avg1) and Fixed Area Averaging (Avg2):

Averaging:

Fixed Area Averaging:

Movie Averaging opens the 'Select Averaging Range' dialog box, which allows you to display the averaged pressure value of each cell for the entire recording, or for a selected range of frames, in one or more composite frame(s). First go to View -> Movie Averaging.

This opens the Movie Averaging dialog below:

To average the movie into a single or multiple frames, do the following: Average the movie into a single frame To exclude the first or last frame from the averaged frame, click in the 'Exclude first frame' or 'Exclude last frame' box. To include only a specific range of frames in the averaged frame calculation, click in the

'Select range' box, and then define the range by entering frame numbers into the 'First frame' and 'Last frame' fields (shown at right).


Average the movie into multiple frames To average the movie into multiple averaged frames, place a check mark in the ‘Average the movie into multiple frames’ check box, and enter a value in the ‘Number of averaged frames’ field.

The movie will be broken into groups of frames, each of which will contain the number of frames you entered. Each of these groups of frames will then be averaged into a single frame. For example, if your movie has 50 frames, and you enter 10 in this field, your averaged movie will have 5 frames. The first frame would have been created by averaging the first 10 frames, the second frames from averaging the second 10 frames, and so on.

Movie Contact Averaging opens the 'Select Averaging Range' dialog box, which allows you to display the averaged (contact) pressure value of each cell for the entire recording, or for a selected range of frames, in one or more composite frame(s). Refer to the description of ‘Movie Averaging’ (above) for instructions.

Movie Contact Averaging is the same as the Movie Averaging option, except that it calculates the cell’s average pressure value in a slightly different manner. The difference between these two types of movie averaging is that cells with zero load are disregarded in this option, whereas they are factored into the formula with a zero value in the Movie Averaging option.

COF (Center of Force): shows the center of all of the forces in the Movie or Real-time window. This feature is useful for showing how the forces are ‘balanced’ on the sensor. The center point is represented on the screen by a gray version of the red and white icon that represents COF on the Tool bar.

The COF coordinates (in X, Y) are determined using the following two equations:

Cols-1 Rows-1 Σ (i* Σ Fij)

Xcof = i = o j = o

Cols-1 Rows-1 Σ (i* Σ Fij) i = o j = o

Rows-1 Cols-1 Σ (i* Σ Fij)

Ycof = i = o j = o

Rows-1 Cols-1 Σ (i* Σ Fij) i = o j = o


Where F is the force at each sensel, the COF calculation takes all forces on the sensor into account, regardless of the Legend’s lower limit.

As an optional feature, you can view the COF for each separate box and tile in a Movie or Real-time window, in addition to the COF for the entire window. Each COF marker will be the same color as its corresponding box or tile. You can disable one or both of these COF features by selecting or de-selecting "Main" or "Boxes", under "COF" in the 'Properties' dialog box. The COF boxes are disabled by default.

COF (Center of Force) Trajectory: displays the movement of the Center of Force for the duration of the recorded movie. The movement of the COF can be tracked by playing a movie one frame at a time, with COF Trajectory selected. The trajectory is represented on the screen by a gray and white line that trails the COF marker. In a Real-time window, COF Trajectory simply shows the center of force. If Peak is also selected, the trajectory of the COF for the entire movie will be shown, and the playback controls will be unavailable.

As an optional feature, you can view the COF Trajectory for each separate box and tile in a Movie window, in addition to the trajectory for the entire window. Each COF Trajectory marker will be the same color as its corresponding box or tile. You can disable one or both of these features by selecting or de-selecting "Main" or "Boxes", under "COF" in the 'Properties' dialog box. The COF Trajectory boxes are disabled by default.

Max (Maximum) Area Frame advances the current movie to the frame that has the largest contact area. The actual contact area value is displayed in the center of the Movie Status Bar. Only pressures that are above the legend’s lower limit (threshold) are displayed, and accounted for in the contact area. Note that Max Area Frame is not available in real-time mode.

Peak: displays the maximum pressure value that each sensel reached during the recording, in one composite frame. This allows you to view, simultaneously, the highest pressures experienced by each part of the sensor during the recording. Peak is available in all 2-D and 3-D display modes. Peak will not affect a snapshot, since a snapshot contains only one frame.


When this item is enabled, the Movie Status Bar will say ‘Peak’, and the movie playback options will be unavailable. If Peak is in effect while COF Trajectory is enabled, the trajectory of the COF for the entire range of frames is displayed.

Save View As Movie (File Menu) is not a display option, but can be essential to the analysis of recorded pressure data. Save View As Movie allows you to save the current movie frame, or view, as a movie file (with extension *.fsx). This new movie file will consist of one frame, and will be saved exactly as it appeared when saved (i.e., any View menu items that were in effect when Save View as Movie was selected will be retained in the saved file.). Note that COF Trajectory will not be displayed by the saved view, since it only affects movies with more than one frame.

COPY OPTIONS TireScan provides a number of copy options that allow you to analyze pressure data in a spreadsheet or word processing program, compare TireScan movie frames, and create reports or documents using actual color movie frames.

When this pressure data is copied, it is saved to the MS Windows clipboard as an image (bitmap), an ASCII (text) file of the actual pressure values, or both, this data can then be pasted into other Windows applications by selecting Edit>> Paste Special in that program and selecting ‘bitmap’ or ‘text’. If the pressure data is pasted as text, some general information, such as the window’s name, header information, comments, date/time, sensor information, and calibration data, is included.

You may copy TireScan pressure data using one of the following methods:

• To copy an entire Movie, Real-time, or Graph window: Click on the desired window to make it active. Select Copy from the Edit pull-down menu (or click the corresponding Toolbar icon), or click the right mouse button while the cursor is above the window and select Copy. The entire active window’s pressure data will be copied to the MS Windows clipboard as both an image (bitmap) and as a text file of the actual pressure values.


The results of Pasting the copied information from a real-time window into MS Excel:

An example of the Header In formation in MS Excel:

An example of the Loaded Sensel data in MS Excel:


• To copy only a specific area of a Movie or Real-time window: Add a box (refer to the ‘Adding an Object’ section) to the Movie or Real-time window, enclosing the area of interest. Select Copy from the Edit pull-down menu (or click the corresponding Toolbar icon), or click the right mouse button while the cursor is over the window and select Copy. The pressure data from the portion of the window that is inside the box will be copied to the clipboard, as both an image (bitmap) and as a text file of the actual pressure values.

You can be sure the box is the only object selected, when you see all 8 nodes in place (the square corner and side markers surrounding the object (in this case, a box above). Notice the mouse pointer is pointing to a node in the image below. Once the box is selected, you can use Edit -> Copy to copy only the contents of the box in an ASCII format.

• To copy the Legend: Right mouse click anywhere on the Legend (color scale), and select Copy. The legend will be copied to the Windows clipboard as an image (bitmap) only. The Copy command (Edit pull-down menu) cannot be used to copy the legend to the clipboard.

Example how to copy the Legend:

Example of the Legend Pasted into MS Excel:


• To copy the entire screen: Press the ‘Print Screen’ key on your computer’s keyboard. A picture of the entire screen, including any open Movie, Real-time, or Graph windows, as well as the Toolbar and Main Menu, will be placed into the Windows clipboard as an image (bitmap) only.

OBJECTS Objects (Tiles, Boxes, and Lines) can be placed in a Movie or Real-time window, and used to display data characteristics for specific areas of the sensor. Tiles enclose the entire window in one box, or divide the window into four equal boxes. The data inside a Box can be displayed and analyzed separately from the rest of the window’s data. Lines can be used to measure the distance or pressure difference between two points on the sensor. Three additional analysis features (Polygons, Blob, and Tracking Box) are also available as Package A. See Appendix E for more information on these features.

Note: Each window has 12 colors avai lable between the boxes, lines, and t i les; a f ter this, all added objects wi ll be gray, and the associated data wi ll not be displayed in a graph.

To add Tiles to a Movie or Real-time window:

1. Select Show Panes from the Analysis pull-down menu (or click the corresponding Toolbar icon), or click on the ‘Add’ button in the ‘Objects’ dialog box (and select ‘Panes’). The ‘Objects’ dialog box can be accessed by selecting Objects from the Analysis menu (or clicking the corresponding Toolbar icon) or by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is over a window, and selecting ‘Objects’.


When the Show Panes option is enabled, the icon is depressed, and a check mark appears next to the option in the Analysis menu. Clicking the icon again will deselect this option and remove the tiles.

2. The ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box (shown below) will appear, and prompt you to select ‘Create a new graph’ or ‘Create another new graph’. You may select one of these, both of these, or neither of these.

If you want to place a single tile (box) in the window, without an accompanying graph, click on ‘Create a new graph’ (to deselect it). The tile will be gray, and no accompanying graph or graph trace will appear. If you wish to graph the data in the tile box(es), refer to the ‘Graphing Section’.

3. Click <OK>. A single tile (pane) will be placed in each open window, enclosing the entire window. If you press the <SHIFT> key and select Show Panes, four (4) tiles will be placed in each window. If you press the <CTRL> key and select this option, the tiles will only be added to the active window.


4. Once placed into a Real-time or Movie window, the tiles can be moved and/or resized so that they enclose the desired areas of the sensor. Refer to the ‘Moving and Sizing Objects’ section for more information.

5. Select which values (or none) you want to display in the small box at the top right corner of each tile. By default, the displayed value will be the total force applied to the sensor in each individual tile. Refer to the ‘Changing Object Display Data’ section for information.

6. If you want to remove the tiles, either click on Show Panes in the Analysis menu (or on the Toolbar icon); right mouse click on one of the lines that create the tiles, then select ‘Delete’; or select the tiles and press ‘Delete’ on your keyboard.

It is also possible to remove tiles by accessing the ‘Objects’ dialog box, selecting the object(s) you want to delete, then clicking on the ‘Delete’ button.

To add a Box or Line to an active Movie or Real-time window:

1. Select Add Box or Add Line from the Analysis pull-down menu (or click the corresponding Toolbar icon), or click the right mouse button while the cursor is over a window, and select Add Box or Add Line.

It is also possible to add a box or line by clicking the Add button in the ‘Objects’ dialog box. The ‘Objects’ dialog box can be accessed by selecting Objects from the Analysis menu (or clicking the corresponding Toolbar icon), or by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is over a window, and selecting Objects.


2. Place the cursor over the active Real-time or Movie window, and the ‘Add Box’ or ‘Add Line’ symbol will be added to the cursor (shown at right). Click the left mouse button to place the box or line at that point in the window.

Shortcut : You can also add a box or line to a Movie or Real- t ime window using the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys on your keyboard. Press the <CTRL> key and click the mouse cursor in an open window to add a box

at that point , or press the <SHIFT> key and click in an open window to add a line.

3. When you place a box or line in a window, the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box will appear (shown at right), and prompt you to select ‘Create a new graph’ or ‘Create another new graph’. You may select one of these, both of these, or neither of these.

To place a box or line in the window, without an accompanying graph, click on ‘Create a new graph’ (to deselect it), then click OK. The box or line will be gray, and no accompanying graph or graph trace will appear. If you wish to graph the data for the box or line, refer to the ‘Graphing Object Data’ section.

Your Box (see image at left) or Line will be placed inside the movie window.

4. Once placed into a Real-time or Movie window, boxes and lines can be moved and/or resized so that they enclose the desired areas of the sensor. Refer to the ‘Moving and Sizing Objects’ section for more information.


Grid Adjustment

The Grid Adjustment affects box placement. If the ‘Grid Adjustment’ box is selected (checked) in the ‘Boxes’ section of the ‘Objects’ dialog box, all four sides of each box will be aligned with the edges of sensor rows and columns. Each side of the box will be moved to the nearest row or column edge, even if this changes the box’s size. If this option is not selected, the boxes may be positioned anywhere inside the window.

If a box is already in place, and Grid Adjustment is checked, the box will move to the nearest sensor row and column edge. Tile edges are always aligned with sensor rows and columns, and the ‘Grid Adjustment’ option does not affect their placement.

1. Select which values (or none) you want to display in the top right corner of each box, or on the midpoint of each line. By default, this value will be the total force applied to the sensor for each box, and the distance between the endpoints for each line. Refer to the ‘Changing Object Display Data’ section for information.

2. If you want to remove a box or line, either right mouse click on the object, then select ‘Delete’, or select the object and press ‘Delete’ on your keyboard. It is also possible to remove a box or line by accessing the ‘Objects’ dialog box, selecting the object(s) you want to delete, then clicking on the ‘Delete’ button. You can select multiple objects in the ‘Objects’ dialog box by holding down the <CTRL> key and clicking on any objects you wish to select. To select a range of objects, hold down the <SHIFT> key and click on the first and last objects in the range.

3. If you have the optional Gross Contact Box feature enabled, the software will draw a line around the perimeter of contact area within a box. To use this feature, add a box to the movie window. Highlight the box and right mouse click on the edge of the box. Select the "Outline Box" option from the Menu list.

You can also enable this feature by placing a check mark in the "Outline Box" checkbox in the 'Box Placement' dialog box.

Once the outline option is on, the box will be drawn by a dotted line, and a solid line will be automatically drawn that outlines the contact perimeter.


The forces and pressures data and graphs displayed for this box will reflect only the cells surrounded by this perimeter line. Selecting Object Area from the Properties menu will accurately reflect the area enclosed by the outlining perimeter.

MOVING AND SIZING OBJECTS Once placed into a Real-time or Movie window, objects (panes, boxes, or lines) can be moved and/or resized. The size or location of an object can be changed using one of the following three methods:

• Method 1: Direct Selection • Method 2: Numerical Placement • Method 3: Through the Objects Dialog Box

Note: Box placement is af fected by the Grid Adjustment set t ing. Refer to the ‘Objects’ sect ion for information on this set t ing.

Method 1 - Direct Selection To move/resize (four) tiles:

1. To move the center-point: Place the cursor at the intersection point of the two lines that create the tiles; a four-way arrow will appear, and that ‘node’ (center-point) can be dragged in any direction. Hold down the left mouse button, and drag the node to the desired position.

2. To move the lines: Place the cursor on one of the lines that create the tiles; a two-way arrow will appear, and hat line can be dragged in either direction. Hold down the left mouse button, and drag that line to the desired position.

Note: Dragging a line all the way to one side wi ll eliminate the t i les created by that line, but wi ll not eliminate the line.


To move a box or line:

1. Click on the box or line to make it active. Place the cursor over an edge of the box or line, and a four-way arrow will appear.

Note: When a box or line is act ive, i ts nodes (small squares around the perimeter) become visible

2. Hold down the left mouse button, and drag the box or line to the desired position inside the window. The entire box or line can be moved anywhere inside the window, without changing its shape. However, the object cannot be dragged out of a window; its size will be reduced if this is attempted.

To resize a box or line:

1. Click on a box or line to make it active. Place the cursor over one of the eight nodes (one at each corner, and one at the midpoint of each side) for a box, or over one of the two nodes (one at each endpoint) for a line.

2. When the cursor is placed over a box node, a two-way arrow appears. When the cursor is placed over a line node, a four-way arrow appears. Hold down the left mouse button, and drag the node until the box or line is the desired size and shape.

Note: If you want the edge of the box to encompass the edge of the sensor, drag the box beyond the border of the window and release i t . It wi ll be truncated to the size of the window.

Method 2 - Numerical Placement 1. Click on an object (pane, box, or line) to make it active. An object is active when its nodes are visible (the

nodes for tiles are at the intersection of any lines).

An example of a Box that is not selected:

The same Box, selected:

2. Click the right mouse button, and you will get the following options: ‘Placement’, ‘Graphs’, or ‘Delete’.


3. Select ‘Placement’. This will bring up the ‘Placement’ dialog box for that object. At the top of the ‘Placement’ dialog box will be either the Movie name (*.fsx) or the Real-time window number (e.g. ‘Real-time 2’), followed by the name(s) of any graph(s) in which the object data is displayed. Shown below is a placement dialog for a box and a line:

4. Enter the desired coordinates in the fields to move and/or resize the object, then click <OK>. The coordinates that may be entered for the objects are: Panes (center-point - X, Y), Box (Left, Top, Right, Bottom), Line (endpoints - X1, Y1 and X2, Y2).

Note: The Movie or Real- t ime window is a graphical representat ion of the actual sensor, so the coordinates in the window correspond to actual rows and columns on the sensor. All coordinates are given from the top lef t corner of the window. The zero point wi ll also rotate i f the window is

rotated.

Method 3 - Objects Dialog Box 1. Open the ‘Objects’ dialog box (below). This dialog box can be accessed by selecting Objects from the

Analysis pull-down menu (or clicking the corresponding Toolbar icon), or by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is over a window, and selecting Objects. Note that with this right-click method, you must click from anywhere outside the lines of the object, and have the object deselected.


The ‘Objects’ dialog box displays information about current object placement coordinates, size and color-coding. Each object is shown graphically, followed by the name of each graph that displays that object’s data, and the object’s position (coordinates) in the real-time or movie window.

2. Select (highlight) the object you wish to move or

resize. Click the ‘Change’ button to bring up the ‘Placement’ dialog box for that object. Click on the ‘Change’ button in the top (‘Boxes’) section of the dialog box to change tiles or boxes, and in the lower (‘Lines’) section to change lines.

At the top of the ‘Placement’ dialog box will be either the movie name (*.fsx) or the Real-time window number (e.g. ‘Real-time 2’), followed by the name(s) of any graph(s) in which the object data is shown.

3. Enter (type in) the desired coordinates in the fields to move and/or resize the object, then click OK. The coordinates that may be entered for the objects are: Tiles (center point - X, Y), Box (Left, Top, Right, Bottom), Line (endpoints - X1, Y1 and X2, Y2).

CHANGING OBJECT DISPLAY DATA TireScan allows you to select which values (or none) you want to display with each object (tiles, boxes, or lines). The Properties option controls the display options of each object that is placed in a Real-time or Movie window.

Note: The uni ts that are selected for length, force, and pressure in the ‘Uni ts of Measure’ dialog box will be displayed for all values. If a calibrat ion has not been performed, force and pressure will be

displayed in ‘Raw’ uni ts.

To change the data displayed with an object:

1. Open the ‘Properties’ dialog box (shown at right). It can be accessed by selecting Properties from the Analysis pull-down menu (or clicking the corresponding icon in the Toolbar), or by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is in a real-time or movie window, and selecting Properties.


The ‘Properties’ dialog box contains the data display options for all of the objects in the active window. Box and tile options are displayed in the upper (‘Boxes’) section of the dialog box, and line options are displayed in the lower (‘Lines’) section. Tiles are simply treated as separate boxes when defining display options.

Note: The Legend’s lower limit should always be set to zero when displaying object data. Pressure values below this limit are disregarded, thereby

changing the displayed ‘Area’, ‘Force’, and 'Pressure’

2. Select which values (or none) you want to display in the small box at the top right corner of each box or tile. Any changes will affect all boxes and tiles in the active window (only). Each value is based solely on that area of the sensor that lies inside that box or tile. You may choose from the following options:

• Force (default): Total force on the sensor area within the box. • Box Area: Actual sensor area inside the box. • Box Pressure: Total pressure on those sensels inside the box. This is

calculated by dividing the total force applied in the box by the total area of the box.

• None: No value is displayed.

There are two display options that include the word ‘Contact’. In these cases, the ‘Contact’ values include only those sensels that have some (greater than zero) load applied to them.

• Contact Area: Area of only the loaded (or ‘contact’) sensels inside the box. • Contact Pressure: Pressure on the loaded sensels, which is calculated by dividing the force by the

‘contact’

There are a number of display options that include the word ‘Peak’. In these cases, ‘Peak’ means the small area (default size is 2 sensels by 2 sensels) inside the box or tile that contains the highest values of the selected property. This peak area will be indicated by a small white or black box, whose size is determined by the ‘dx’ and ‘dy’ values in the ‘Peak Area’ section of the dialog box.

• Peak Force: Highest area of force inside the box or tile. • Peak Box Pressure: Highest-pressure area inside the box or tile, calculated as the force inside the peak

box divided by the peak box area. • Peak Contact Pressure: Same as the ‘Peak Box Pressure’, except the pressure is calculated using only

the contact area, instead of the entire box area. The contact area is the area within the peak box that has greater than zero contact pressure


3. If ‘Peak Force’, ‘Peak Box Pressure’, or ‘Peak Contact Pressure’ has been selected, you may change the size of the peak area. This peak area is displayed graphically as a white or black box (depending on the background color). You may define the size of the peak box by entering the following values in the ‘Peak Area’ section at the right of the dialog box:

dx the length (number of sensels) of the X (horizontal) side of the peak box. dy the length (number of sensels) of the Y (vertical) side of the peak box.

Note: Each of these values (‘dx’ and ‘dy’) must be between 1 and the size of the box; i f larger than the box, the peak area will become the ent ire box’s width (or

height).

On the right side of the ‘Properties’ dialog box, you can further define the box attributes that have been selected for the box(s). Note that any unavailable options will be grayed out. You may choose from the following options:

• Absolute (default): Force, area, or pressure as an absolute value. • Percentage: Force, area, or pressure inside the box as a percentage of the total force, area, or pressure

for the entire sensor. • Per Box Column: Force, area, or pressure for only those sensor columns that fall inside the box. • Per Box Row: Force, area, or pressure for only those sensor rows that fall inside the box. • Per Contact Column: Force, area, or pressure for only the loaded (or ‘contact’) sensor columns that

fall inside the box. • Per Contact Row: Force, area, or pressure for only the loaded sensor rows that fall inside the box.

On the right side of the dialog box, you can also choose your Center of Force options (under ‘COF’). You can choose one, both, or neither of the following options:

• Main: The gray COF or COF Trajectory marker will be visible in any open Movie or Real-time windows (when the View>>COF or COF Trajectory option is in effect). The ‘Main’ item is enabled by default.

• Boxes: The color-coded COF marker for each box and tile will be displayed inside that object in the Movie or Real-time window (when the View>>COF option is in effect). This option also applies to COF Trajectory, which can only be displayed in a Movie window. Each COF or COF Trajectory marker will be the same color as its corresponding box or tile, while the COF marker for the entire window will be gray. The “Boxes” item is disabled by default.

4. Select which values (or none) you want to display in the small box on the midpoint of each line. By default, this value will be the distance between the endpoints of the line (this value corresponds to an actual distance on the sensor). Any changes will affect all lines in the active window only.

At the bottom of the ‘Properties’ dialog box, under ‘Lines’, is a list of the attributes that may be displayed. You may choose from the following options:

• Distance (default): Length of the line • Pressure Difference: Difference in pressure between the sensels beneath

the two endpoints of the line. • None: No value will be displayed.

5. In the lower left corner of the dialog box, select which other display options you would like to use:


• Fill Contour: If this box is checked, the 2-D Contours view shows each contour filled completely with the color corresponding to the sensed pressure range. If this box is not checked, pressure boundaries are represent ed by colored ‘topographic’ lines only.

• Object Label: Check this box if you would like to display the label for each object in the Real-time or movie window. If you prefer to view objects without their labels, uncheck this box.

• Row Mirroring: If this box is checked, the entire sensor will be mirrored across the rows. • Column Mirroring: To mirror the sensor across columns, check this box.

GRAPHING OBJECT DATA TireScan enables you to represent specific area(s) of Real-time or Movie window data in a Graph. The data associated with the snapshot window and each object (tiles, boxes, and lines) in a window is depicted in the Graph as a color-coded ‘trace’.

To create a graph:

1. Add an object to the active Movie or Real-time window. Refer to the ‘Objects’ section for instructions. When you add an object, the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box is displayed, with the following options: ‘Create a new graph’ or ‘Create another new graph’. By default, ‘Create a new graph’ will be highlighted (shown at right).

Note: Each opt ion that is selected will be highlighted (mult iple select ions are possible), and clicking on an i tem will select or deselect

i t .

2. Make sure that ‘Create a new graph’ is selected in the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box, then click OK. A graph (Graph 1) will be placed in the bottom portion of the screen, presenting the object’s data as a color-coded graph trace. The graph trace will be the same color as the object, and the actual data values will be displayed to the right of the graph. The default graph is ‘Force vs. Time’ for Movie windows (‘Force vs. Distance’ for Real-time), but many different variables can be displayed.

Note: The graph will only include traces for objects in which non-zero pressures were detected during the recording.

If ‘Create another new graph’ is also selected, a second graph (Graph 2) will be opened, and will contain the same object’s color-coded information. If ‘Create another new graph’ is selected, but ‘Create a new graph’ is not, only one new graph (Graph 1) will be opened.

Note: Each window has 12 colors avai lable between all objects; af ter this, each added object wi ll be gray and the associated data wi ll not be displayed in a graph.


To add another object to the same graph:

Add another object to the active Movie or Real-time window. When the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box (shown below) is displayed, select an existing graph (such as ‘Graph 1’) and click <OK>. The object’s color-coded trace will be displayed in Graph 1. Any graphs that are currently open will also be listed as an option in the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box.

To change which graph displays an object:

1. Select an existing object, to make it active. Click the right mouse button on one of the lines of the object, and then select either ‘Graphs’ or ‘Placement’. If you select Graphs, the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box will be displayed, and you can make your changes.

If you select Placement, the ‘Placement’ dialog box will appear. Click the Graphs button in this dialog box to display the ‘Select Graphs’ dialog box. Clicking on the Change button in the ‘Objects’ dialog box can also open the ‘Placement’ dialog box.

2. Modify the graph format, if necessary. Refer to ‘Changing Graph Display Options’ for further instructions.

Note: The display opt ions for objects and graphs are selected separately , so the data displayed in the graph can be di f ferent from that displayed in the actual object .


UNDERSTANDING THE GRAPH DATA: Review the data to the right of the graph. This information includes the name of the object’s corresponding movie or real-time window, followed by the actual (color-coded) Y-axis data values and the X-axis value. For each colored graph trace, a value is displayed that indicates the force, pressure, or area (Y-axis value) for that object at that point on the X-axis. These values correspond to the intersection of the white vertical ‘time line’ with the colored line graph.

If this information is not fully visible, you may view the data by using the scroll bars, or you may expand this area by dragging (with your cursor) the divider that separates it from the actual graph.

Refer to ‘Changing Graph Display Options’ for information on setting the graph’s X and Y-axis parameters.

Using the graph functions:

The white vertical time line marks the point on the X-axis for which the Y-axis reading is being displayed. The data values displayed to the right correspond to the intersection of the vertical time line with the colored line graph. If data from more than one Movie window is displayed in the graph, the small number 1 or 2 above the time line indicates which window that particular line is tracking.

If none of the graph’s object data is from a Real-time window, the X-axis can be set to ‘Time’ or ‘Frame’. In this case, the time line displays the elapsed time or frame number at that point in a movie. You can observe both the time line and the data values to the right change in unison as you play back a recording. When the mouse cursor is over the time line, a two-way arrow appears, and the line can be dragged to any position on the graph. Dragging the time line will speed up the playback of a recording. Click the mouse cursor anywhere in the display area of the graph and the time line will instantly jump to that point.

Note: A ‘Paused’ movie wi ll not respond to movements of the t ime line.

• Copy: Will copy the active Graph window to the Windows clipboard, from which it can be pasted into other applications as an image (bitmap) or as ASCII (text).


• Background White: Will toggle the graph’s (only) background color between black and white.

• Zoom In / Zoom Out: These options allow you to zoom in on a specific area of the graph; the scale of the X and Y-axis will change to reflect the smaller or larger view area. Note that the zoom options are not available when the graph has less than 16 frames, or relates to a real-time window. Refer to the ‘Main Menu’ section for a description of the other options (‘Units’, ‘Objects’, and ‘Properties’).

• Units opens the Measurement Units dialog box (found also under the Options drop-down menu. Objects and Properties opens their corresponding dialog boxes, which are also located under the Analysis drop-down menu

Click on the ‘X’ in the top right corner of the Graph window (standard Windows function). The graph will automatically close if the corresponding object(s) is deleted.

CHANGING GRAPH DISPLAY OPTIONS TireScan enables you to control how each graph will be presented on the screen, independently of the corresponding Movie and/or Real-time window(s). If Properties is selected when a graph is the active window, the ‘Properties’ dialog box will contain the data display options for that graph. Changing the attributes of a graph will not change those of its corresponding object, and vice versa. The graph display options are the same as those available for a box in a movie or real-time window, except the word ‘object’ replaces the word ‘box’.

Note: The uni ts that are selected for length, force, and pressure in the ‘Uni ts of Measure’ dialog box will be displayed for all values. If a calibrat ion has not been performed, force and pressure will be displayed in ‘Raw’

uni ts.

To change the data displayed in the Graph:

1. Select the Graph window to make it active. Open the ‘Properties’ dialog box (shown below). It can be accessed by selecting Properties from the Analysis pull-down menu (or clicking the corresponding icon in the Toolbar), or by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is on the Graph, and selecting Properties.


The ‘Properties’ dialog box contains the data display options for the X and Y-axes of the active graph. ‘Y-Axis’ options are displayed in the upper section of the dialog box, and ‘X-Axis’ options are displayed in the lower section.

2. Choose the display options for the Y-axis. On the left side of the ‘Properties’ dialog box, under ‘Y-axis’, is a list of the attributes that may be displayed on the vertical axis of the graph. Any changes will affect only the active graph.

Note: The Legend’s lower limit should always be set to zero when displaying object da ta. Pressure values below this limit are disregarded, thereby changing the displayed ‘Area’, ‘Force’, and

‘Pressure.’

Note: The values for each opt ion below are only for the area (sensels) ei ther inside the box, or beneath the line.

Note: At tributes (force, area, pressure) associated with a line are simply those at tributes of the sensels that are in contact w i th the line.

• Force (default): Total force for the object. • Object Area: Actual sensor area of the object. • Object Pressure: Total pressure of the object. This is calculated by dividing the total force applied by

the total area.

Force Vs. Time (Default)

Object Area Vs. Time



Object Pressure Vs. Time

There are two display options that include the word ‘Contact’. In these cases, the ‘Contact’ values include only those sensels that have some (greater than zero) load applied to them.

• Contact Area: Area of only the loaded, or ‘contact’ sensels. • Contact Pressure: Pressure on the loaded sensels, which is calculated by dividing the force by the

contact area

Contact Area Vs. Time

Contact Pressure Vs. Time

There are a number of display options that include the word ‘Peak’. In these cases, ‘Peak’ means the small area (default size is 2 sensels by 2 sensels) of the object that contains the highest values of the selected property.

• Peak Force: Highest area of force in the object. • Peak Object Pressure: Highest-pressure area in the object, calculated as the force inside the peak

box divided by the peak box area. • Peak Contact Pressure: Same as the ‘Peak Object Pressure’, except the pressure is calculated using the

force and contact area.


Peak Force Vs. Time (Default)

Peak Object Pressure Vs. Time

Peak Contact Pressure Vs. Time

3. On the right side of the ’Properties’ dialog box (under ‘Y-Mode’), you may further define the Y-axis attributes that have been selected for the graph. Note that any unavailable options will be grayed out. You may choose from the following options:

• Absolute (default): Force, area, or pressure as an absolute value. • Percentage: Force, area, or pressure for the object as a percentage of

the total force, area, or pressure for the entire sensor. • Per Object Column: Force, area, or pressure for only those

sensor columns under the object. • Per Object Row: Force, area, or pressure for only those sensor rows under the object. • Per Contact Column: Force, area, or pressure for only those loaded, or contact, columns under the

object. • Per Contact Row: Force, area, or pressure for only those loaded, or contact, rows under the object.

4. Choose the display options for the X-axis. At the bottom of the ‘Properties’ dialog box, under ‘X-axis’, is a list of the attributes that may be displayed on the horizontal axis of the graph. Any changes will affect only the active graph. You may choose from the following options:

• Time (movies only): Elapsed time • Frames (movies only): Movie frame number • Distance Across Columns: Width of the sensor in the X-axis • Distance Across Rows: Length of the sensor on the X-axis.


When ‘Time’ or ‘Frame’ is selected, the data is displayed as a line graph; and when ‘Distance Across Rows’ or ‘Distance Across Columns’ is selected, the data is displayed as a bar graph.

5. When ‘Distance Across Columns’ or ‘Distance Across Rows’ has been selected, the following two options become available in the ‘X-mode’ section on the right side of the dialog box:

• Absolute: The zero point of the window will be used as the zero point for the X-axis. • Relative: The edge of the specific object will be used as the zero point for the X-axis.

6. When ‘Distance Across Columns’ or ‘Distance Across Rows’ is selected, the following options become available on the lower right side of the dialog box, under ‘Histogram’:

• Columns: The number of bars (grouped columns) that will be displayed in the histogram. • Rows: The number of bars (grouped rows) that will be displayed in the histogram.

These two options allow you to change the number of bars displayed in the graph. You must enter an integer between 1 and the maximum number of sensor columns or rows (44 is most common).

The data from the columns or rows will be combined into the number of groups chosen, and the properties (force, area, or pressure) of these grouped columns or rows will be summed and displayed as one bar. For example, if ‘Columns’ is set to 4, and the sensor being used has 44 columns, the X-axis of the graph will show 11 bars, with each bar displaying the total force, area, or pressure on four sensor columns.

• Bar Display: If selected, the data in the histogram will simply be displayed as separate bars (grouped columns or rows). If this item is not selected, the midpoint of each of the separate bars is connected to make a smoother graph trace.

7. Select your options for Y-Scale:

• Auto Scale: The software automatically applies a scale to the Y-axis. This is the default scale selection. • Fixed Scale: To enter your own scale to be displayed on the Y-axis, click to select this option. Enter

values in the Maximum and Minimum fields. These numbers will be used as the maximum and minimum values for the Y-axis of the graph.

SAVING/LOADING OBJECT FILES TireScan allows you to save the objects (tiles, boxes, and lines) from an active Real-time or Movie window as a retrievable file. This option is necessary because, when a current window is saved as a movie file, the objects in the window are not saved as part of the file.

Note: If you change any object placements and do not save them, the sof tware WILL NOT ask you i f you wish to save them when you exi t .

To save an Object file:

When you are satisfied with the size and placement of the objects in your Movie or Real-time window, select Save Object File from the 'Analysis' pull-down menu. This option can also be accessed by clicking the Save Object File button in the ‘Objects’ dialog box.


When Save Object File is selected, a ‘Save As’ dialog box will be displayed, and the file can be saved as an object file (with an *.fbx extension). The default filename will be the name of the active window (e.g. “Movie1.fbx” or “Real-time2.fbx”). Objects are saved exactly as they appear in the window, with the same properties and coordinates.

To load an Object file:

Open a Movie or Real-time window, and then select Load Object File from the 'Analysis' pull-down menu. Load Object File can also be accessed by clicking the Load Object File button in the ‘Objects’ dialog box.


When Load Object File is selected, an ‘Open’ dialog box is displayed, and object files (with the extension *.fbx only) can be opened. When an object file is loaded into the current window, the objects will be placed at their saved coordinates. If the current window is not the same size as the original window, the software will still attempt to place the objects at the correct coordinates.

Note: Objects that are loaded from an object f i le may not be the same color as when

they were saved, since the sof tware assigns colors to objects in the order they are placed

into the current window.

SAVING ASCII DATA TireScan enables you to save the current Movie, Real-time or Graph window data as an ASCII (text) file, with the filename and location of your choice. Data can be saved for an entire window, or for a single object. Specifically, you can save frame sensel pressure data, center of force (COF) data, or graph data.

Since these files are in ASCII format, they can be imported into a spreadsheet program (e.g. MS Excel), or they can be opened in a text editor or word processing program (e.g. MS Word) in order to review and manipulate the data.

Note: The orientat ion of ASCII data in a f i le is independent of the rotat ion of the display window on-screen.

To create an ASCII file for an entire window:

1. Click on the Movie or Real-time window of interest to make it active.

2. Select Save ASCII from the File pull-down menu.


3. When the ‘Save ASCII’ dialog box (shown at right) is opened, select the desired ‘Data Type’ - either ‘Frame data’ or ‘Center of force (COF)’.

Note: Real- t ime windows are simply treated as single- frame movies.

If you select ‘COF’, the coordinates of the center of force for each frame will be saved. The output ASCII file will contain a list of the COF row/column coordinates for the selected range of frames. If there is no data in a frame, “(-1, -1)” will be output to the file for that frame.

If you select ‘Frame data’, sensel pressures will be saved for the selected range of frames. The output ASCII file contains a table of sensed pressures in sensor row/column format.

4. Select the desired ‘Movie Range’. You may save data for the current frame, the whole movie or a custom range of frames. If you select a custom range of frames, you must specify the start and end frame of the data to be saved. The start frame number must be less than or equal to the end frame number, but greater than zero. The end frame number must be greater than or equal to the start frame number, but less than or equal to the number of frames in the movie.

If a Real-time window is active, the current information will be saved, regardless of which option is selected. For ASCII information, Real-time windows are simply treated as single-frame movies.

5. When you have specified the type of data and the data range, click <OK>. The ‘Save As’ dialog box will appear, and you must specify the file attributes - drive, directory, filename, file extension - or use the defaults. The Frame data ASCII files must be saved with the extension *.asf, and center of force (COF) ASCII files must be saved with the extension *.asc. Note that your system may limit file names to eight characters.


When one of these files is opened, the movie and sensor information (i.e. sensor type, number of rows and columns, etc.) is displayed, followed by the data. The following image shows the data for a single frame (the peak frame) within MS Excel. Note that when opening the file in MS Excel you must change the file type drop-down to "All Files" and then select the appropriate file. An import wizard will guide you through the appropriate steps to open the file. The screen images are outlined to the right and below:


The final ASCII data will look something like the following in Excel:

SAVING AN ASCII FILE FOR AN OBJECT The following outlines how to save an ASCII file for an object, such as a Box or a Line.

1. Click on the Movie, Real-time, or Graph window of interest to make it active. In this example, a box object was placed on the movie.

2. Open the ‘Objects’ dialog box. This dialog box can be accessed by selecting Objects from the Analysis pull-down menu (or by clicking the corresponding Tool bar icon), or by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is over the window, and selecting ‘Objects’.

If the active window is a graph window, you can also open the ‘Objects’ dialog box by selecting Save ASCIII from the File menu.

3. In the ‘Objects’ dialog box, select (highlight) the object(s) you wish to save as an ASCII file. You may select a single object, or multiple objects, in both the ‘Boxes’ (upper) and ‘Lines’ (lower) sections. To select more than one object simultaneously, hold down the <CTRL> key and click on any object you wish to select. To select a range of objects, hold down the <SHIFT> key and click on the first and last objects in the range.


4. Once you’ve highlighted the object(s), click the ‘Save ASCII’ button in the appropriate (‘Boxes’ or ‘Lines’) section.

5. A message will open asking if you want to save the Force/Pressure/Area values or save the COF values. Select your choice.

6. The ‘Properties’ (graph) dialog box will be displayed, and you may choose which values to save for the X- and Y-axis in the ASCII file, without changing the graph display. Click <OK> once you’ve made your selections.

7. The ‘Save As’ dialog box will then appear, and you must specify the file attributes - drive, directory, filename, file extension - or use the defaults. The data for the selected object(s) will be saved into the specified file. Object ASCII files must be saved with the extension *.asg.

The output file will contain the elapsed time (‘Time’), frame number (‘Frame’), the Y-axis value (force, area, pressure) that was selected in Properties (default is force), and the object’s color (e.g. ‘Y: Yellow’), for each object that was selected in the ‘Objects’ dialog box.

Note: For ASCII information, Real- t ime windows are simply treated as single- frame movies.


When one of these files is opened, the movie and sensor information (i.e. sensor type, number of rows and columns, etc.) is displayed, followed by the data. The following shows an example of the ASCII file opened in MS Excel:

READING ASCII DATA TireScan software has the ability to open ASCII files and view them as pressure movies. Only files with the *.asf file extension may be opened.

To read an ASCII file:

1. Select Open Movie from the File pull-down menu. This will bring up the ‘Open’ dialog box.

2. Click the down arrow in the ‘files of type’ field. Select ASCII (*.asf ).

3. All available files will be listed. Select the desired movie and click Open.


COPY & EXPORT OPTIONS

COPY OPTIONS I-Scan provides a number of copy options that allow you to analyze pressure data in a spreadsheet or word processing program, compare I-Scan movie frames, and create reports or documents using actual color movie frames.

When this pressure data is copied, it is saved to the MS Windows clipboard as an image (bitmap), an ASCII (text) file of the actual pressure values, or both. This data can then be pasted into other Windows applications by selecting Edit>> Paste Special in that program and selecting ‘bitmap’ or ‘text’. If the pressure data is pasted as text, some general

information, such as the window’s name, header information, comments, date/time, sensor information, and calibration data, is included.

You may copy I-Scan pressure data using one of the following methods:

• To copy an entire Movie, Real-time, or Graph window: Click on the desired window to make it active. SelectCopy from the Edit pull-down menu (or click the corresponding Toolbar icon), or click the right mouse button while the cursor is above the window and select Copy. The entire active window’s pressure data will be copied to the MS Windows clipboard as both an image (bitmap) and as a text file of the actual pressure values. The image at right shows the results of Pasting the copied information from a real-time window into MS Excel.


To copy only a specific area of a Movie or Real-time window: Add a box (refer to the ‘Adding an Object’ section) to the Movie or Real-time window, enclosing the area of interest. Select Copy from the Edit pull-down menu (or click the corresponding Toolbar icon), or click the right mouse button while the cursor is over the window and select Copy. The pressure data from the portion of the window that is inside the box will be copied to the clipboard, as both an image (bitmap) and as a text file of the actual pressure values (see images at right).

You can be sure the box is the only object selected, when you see all 8 nodes in place (the square corner and side markers surrounding the object (in this case, a box above). Notice the mouse pointer is pointing to a node in the image at right. Once the box is selected, you can use Edit -> Copy to copy only the contents of the box in an ASCII format.

• To copy the Legend: Right mouse click anywhere on the Legend (color scale),

and select Copy. The legend will be copied to the Windows clipboard as an image (bitmap) only. The Copy command (Edit pull-down menu) cannot be used to copy the legend to the clipboard.

Example how to copy the Legend

Example of the Legend Pasted into MS Excel

• To copy the entire screen: Press the ‘Print Screen’ key on your computer’s keyboard. A picture of the entire screen, including any open Movie, Real-time, or Graph windows, as well as the Toolbar and Main Menu, will be placed into the Windows clipboard as an image (bitmap) only.

04/02/09 I-Scan User Manual (Rev N) 171

EXPORT OPTIONS

Note: This chart provides an overview of what can be exported from Tekscan into other programs and how this informat ion can be exported. For a full explanat ion of each opt ion, please refer to the “Copy & Export Opt ions” sect ion found in your system sof tware Help Fi le under the

“Help” menu.

Where do you want to use the exported information?

Word Processor (MS Word) Presentation (MS PowerPoint)

Spreadsheet (MS Excel)

Image File (Static - .BMP)

Video File (Dynamic - .AVI)

Printout (Hard Copy)

Report File (PDF)

Method Used to export data

Wha

t do

you

wan

t to

expo

rt fr

om T

eksc

an?

Movie Frame (2-D or 3-D Image)

Copy & Paste Special Copy & Paste N/A Print Acrobat or PDF995

Legend (Image)

Copy & Paste N/A N/A Print Acrobat or PDF995

Graph (Image)

Copy & Paste Special Copy & Paste N/A Copy & Paste Special Copy & Paste Special

Whole Movie or Whole Movie with synchronized video (Video)

SnagIt

or

Hypercam

N/A

SnagIt

or

Hypercam

N/A N/A

Entire Application Window (Image)

Alt + Print Screen Alt + Print Screen N/A Alt + Print Screen Alt + Print Screen

Comments (Text)

Copy & Paste N/A N/A Print Acrobat or PDF995

Movie Frame (Array Data)

Copy & Paste or ASCII data N/A N/A Copy & Paste Copy & Paste

04/02/09 I-Scan User Manual (Rev N)

SAVING AN AVI (FILE MENU - OPTIONAL) The Save AVI is an optional feature which allows you to export the currently selected Tekscan movie (*.fsx file) into a digital video format (*.avi file) that can be saved on your computer. The following instructions explain how to use this feature. An .avi file can be:

• Emailed to colleagues for viewing on their computer.

• Imported into a MS PowerPoint presentation to highlight animated pressure profiles.

• Used in a video analysis system to synchronize pressure data with visual images of a subject in motion.

1. Select File>Save AVI. The following dialog opens (shown below), where you can select the exported video frame rate, video dimensions (in pixels), and file name.

Note: Select ing a lower or higher frame rate af fects the size and quali ty of the video. A lower frame rate means smaller .avi f i le size and lower quali ty v ideo. A higher frame rate means a larger .avi

f i le size, but does not necessari ly provide a bet ter v ideo quali ty . If you are going to send the result ing video via email, use a frame rate between 15 and 25. Otherwise, the default set t ing

(same frame rate as the .fsx f i le) is recommended.

Note: What you see on-screen in the Movie is what wi ll be saved as an .avi v ideo. This means that any view opt ions (objects, panes, COF Trajectory, View Mode -- 2-D or 3-D) will be included in the

.avi .

2. If you wish, adjust the Exported AVI Frame Rate (frames/sec). This can be any number between 1 and 1000.


3. Enter the dimensions of the AVI video in the Width and Height input fields. The default width and height listed is the .fsx dimensions that were on-screen before you entered the "Save AVI" dialog. If you resize the movie window, then go into the "Save AVI" dialog, these numbers will update. In addition, the width and height are constrained proportionally (their aspect ratio remains constant). This means that entering a value in the Width field will update the Height field relatively. This is done to ensure the video aspect ratio (Length x Width) remains the same when resized. Finally, the Width and Height values are approximate. This is due to the difference between sensel and pixel sizes. They are accurate +/- 5% approximately.

4. By default, the movie is saved into the same folder where the Tekscan movie (*.fsx) is located -- in the Client File Management System (database). If you wish to save the movie to a new location, click the Browse button. The Browse button opens the "Save As" dialog, where you can specify a folder on your computer where the file should be saved, as well as the file name. When finished selecting the proper folder and name for the file, click the Save button.

Note: Movie f i les can only be saved as an avi f i le type.

5. Back in the "Save AVI File" dialog, click OK. The "Video Compression" dialog opens, where you can select the compressor, compression quality, and configure compression options. By default, the .avi file is encoded with Full Frames (Uncompressed), meaning that no compression is applied to the video. This could potentially result in a very large file size. To reduce size, you can apply a compressor to the video. If you wish to do so, click the arrow to the right of the "Compressor" drop-down box. A list of all codecs installed on your computer are displayed.

Note: The choices avai lable in your list may be di f ferent from what is displayed below, depending which compressors are insta lled on your computer.

Not all codecs installed on your computer will work with the Save AVI feature. Tekscan recommends the Cinepak Codec by Radius codec. This is a fairly generic codec that is available on most computers and this codec has been tested to work with the Save AVI feature.


In the event a codec cannot be used, you will receive the following warning message below. If this happens, try using the Cinepak Codec by Radius.

6. Once a compressor is selected from the list, you may be able to select the Compression Quality on the "Video Compression" dialog (shown below). Since Tekscan movies are small to begin with, lowering the Compression Quality is not necessary, and will not result in a smaller file size or poor image quality. Therefore, it is recommended you keep the default Compression Quality as is (100).

7. Click the OK button on the "Video Compression" dialog. The software converts the *.fsx file to an *.avi file and saves it in the designated location on your computer. Depending on the length of the movie and your compression settings, this may take some time. A blue status bar indicates the progress of video rendering. Once finished, you can use any video playback software (such as Microsoft Media Player or Apple Quick Time) to play the video file.

Note: Codec is short for "video encoder and video decoder." It allows video to be encoded when created, and decoded when played back. This means tha t the codec used to encode the video must be installed on any computer which is playing back the v ideo. If i t is not , then the video will not

play and an error is generated. This should not be an issue i f you are playing back the video on the same computer from which the video was created. However, this can be a problem i f the video is transferred to other computers. If transferring videos from one computer to another, ensure the

dest inat ion computer also has the appropriate codec installed.


EDITING The software allows you to edit data using two methods: by removing unwanted frames from a movie (Cut Frames), or by modifying specific areas of data in a Movie or Real-time window (Edit Mode).

The Edit Mode functions permit you to remove data from one or more sensels, or to average sensel reading(s) with those of its neighbors, in either a Movie or a Real-time window.

The Cut Frames feature allows you to cut specific unwanted frames from a movie.

REAL-TIME EDITING Damage may occur to a sensor due to use (excessive wrinkling, folding, etc.) or trimming. Individual sensels or even rows and columns may develop shorts or opens. Shorts may appear as red sensels in the real-time window, even when no pressure is applied to the sensor. Opens will show up in the real-time window as missing rows, columns, or sensels, even though there is a load being applied to those areas of the sensor. With Real-time Editing, you can define a "mask" for these sensels, which replaces their readings with an average of those of their neighbors in the display, or you can remove specific sensels altogether.

IMPORTANT! ‘Real- t ime Edi t ing’ is meant to be used to ‘repair’ one or two bad rows / columns or a few hot spots on a sensor. Do not use i t to f ix large areas of the sensor or adjacent rows or columns, since the data you obtain wi th such a sensor wi ll be poor. If this is necessary, the

sensor should be replaced.

1. Click on the real-time window to make it the active window. Click on the View menu, and select 2-D. In 2-D mode, it is possible to see each individual sensel, making editing much easier.

2. When Edit Mode is selected, the real-time window will automatically be paused. It will return to normal when the dialog box is closed. You can also manually ‘Pause’ (freeze) the real-time window in which you want to edit sensels, by selecting View>>Pause, or by clicking on ‘Sensor OK’ in the Real-time status bar. The title bar should say ‘(Paused)’. This frozen frame should clearly show the bad row, column or cell to be fixed. It will be very difficult to correctly edit sensels if the bad cells are not shown.

3. Click on the Edit menu, and select Edit Mode. The Edit dialog box that appears (below) will apply only to the currently active Movie or Real-time window (the name of the active window will be shown in the Edit box title).


4. Select the ‘Add Edit Cell’ or ‘Add Edit Box’ buttons on the right of the dialog box. ‘Add Edit Cell’ is used when you want to edit an individual sensel. ‘Add Edit Box’ is used when you want to edit a group of sensels.

Note: The edi t opt ions can also be selected by placing the cursor over the act ive window, clicking the right mouse

but ton, and select ing the desired opt ion, as shown below.

5. Place the cursor at the desired point in the real-time window (a ‘pencil’ symbol will be added to the cursor) and click the left mouse button. A gray edit box or edit cell will be placed at that point.

6. Once an edit box/cell has been placed, it can be moved in the window, just as an object can be moved. Click on any edge of the edit box/cell with the left mouse button, and a four-way arrow will appear. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to move the edit box/cell until it is in the sensor area that you wish to edit.

The dimensions of an edit box may also be changed. Click on one of the eight nodes on the box’s outline, and a two-way arrow will appear. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the node until the edit box outlines the group of sensels that you wish to edit.


Note: The sof tware automatically aligns the edges of edi t boxes and edi t cells wi th the edges of sensor rows and columns.

When you place any edit cells/boxes on a real-time window and then record the movie, the next real-time window you open will already have the edit cells/boxes placed in the movie window in the same position; provided you are still within the same session. Clicking on the New Session button removes this inheritance, and any further real-time windows you open will not contain any edit cells/boxes.

With a real-time window, when you place edit cells/boxes, and then close the window or application, you will receive the following message warning you that your edit cells/boxes will be lost if you do not save them.

Be sure that you save any edit cells/boxes within an "edit file." This procedure is discussed in the Saving/Loading Edit Files section.

Edit Options:

Once you have placed the edit box/cell around the damaged sensel(s), the selected edit option will be applied to each of the sensor cell values inside or outside the edit box/cell, depending. The possible "Edit Options" are as follows:

• Add Edit Cell [Delete Internal]: Sets the pressure reading of the edit cell to a value of 0 (no pressure).


• * Add Edit Cell [~Average Internal]: Sets the pressure reading of the edit cell to the average of the pressure readings of the neighboring sensels (see image at right).

• Add Edit Box [Delete Internal]: Sets the pressure reading inside the edit box to a value of 0 (no pressure – see image at left).

• Add Edit Box ]Delete External[: Sets the pressure reading outside the edit box to a value of 0 (no pressure – see image at right).


• Add Edit Box [~Average Internal]: Sets the pressure reading inside the edit box to the average of the pressure readings of the neighboring sensels (see image at right).

* Cells are averaged in the

following manner: If the edi t cell/box is:

• >2 sensels wide and > 2 sensels high, all sensels inside the edit box will be the average value of the cells inside the box.

• ≤2 sensels wide, each sensel value is calculated by averaging the sensels that border the edit box on the left and right.

• ≤2 sensels in height, each sensel value is calculated by averaging the sensels that border the edit box on the top and bottom.

• ≤2 sensels in width and height, the sensels values are calculated by averaging the sensels that border the edit box on the left and right (edit cells are calculated this way).

1. Choose your edit box view options. Select ‘View Modified Data’ if you want to view the edited sensel values in the real-time window. Select ‘View Boxes’ if you want to see the edit box outlines; de-selecting this option will hide the boxes.

2. When you have added all the edit boxes/cells you wish to add, click the Close button in the Edit dialog box. When you open this movie at a later time, the edited sensels will have their new values. Any further changes to the sensel data can still be performed on the edit cells/boxes. New edit cells/boxes can be added or removed at any time.

Note: Edi t boxes/cells are not v isible in the Real- t ime window, unless the Edi t dialog box is open, and ‘View Boxes’ is selected. However, when the cursor is placed over an

edi t box/cell in the window, the cursor becomes a ‘penci l’ symbol to show i ts locat ion, or a two-way or four-way arrow, to allow you to make changes.

Note: The edi t box/cell information (posi t ion and edi t opt ions) can be saved at any t ime while a Real- t ime window is open, using the ‘Save Edi t Fi le’ opt ion. This is

helpful i f you would like to use the same edi t boxes/cells in another window. Refer to the ‘Load/Save Edi t Fi le’ sect ion for more information.


View Edit Options & Ranges:

This option allows you to view the range of frames that are being targeted within a movie. The edit range is displayed in the upper right corner of the edit box, as shown below:

This option becomes extremely useful when you are viewing a movie that has multiple frames. You can set up different edit boxes to affect specific frames within the movie. To target a specific number of frames, highlight the edit box with your cursor (the cursor will change to a 4-sided arrow). Then right-click and select "Edit Box/Cell Option & Range."

The following dialog opens where you can change the Edit Box/Cell Options, as well as the frames within the movie which are to be affected by the edit option.


When you select a specific frame range, and click OK, the frame range and edit options are displayed within the right corner of the edit box, as shown below:

MOVIE EDITING Movie Editing can be used to improve the data display if the sensor became damaged during use, or if excessive noise appeared outside the main contact area. You may also remove entire frames from a movie, as described in the Cut Frames section.

Note: Movie Edi t ing is non-destruct ive. The movie's original state can always be retrieved by removing any edi t ing cells or boxes from the movie.

1. Open the movie file. Click on the View menu, and select 2-D. In 2-D mode, it is possible to see each individual sensel, making editing much easier.

2. Click on the Edit menu, and select Edit Mode. The Edit dialog box that appears (see image below) will apply only to the currently active Movie or Real-time window (the name of the active window will be shown in the Edit dialog's title).

To place an edit box or edit cell:

1. Select any of the five choices on the right of the dialog box:

• Add Edit Cell [Delete Internal]: Sets the pressure reading of the edit cell to a value of 0 (no pressure).

• * Add Edit Cell [~Average Internal]: Sets the pressure reading of the edit cell to the average of the pressure readings of the neighboring sensels.

• Add Edit Box [Delete Internal]: Sets the pressure reading inside the edit box to a value of 0 (no pressure).

• Add Edit Box ]Delete External[: Sets the pressure reading outside the edit box to a value of 0 (no pressure).

• * Add Edit Box [~Average Internal]: Sets the pressure reading inside the edit box to the average of the pressure readings of the neighboring sensels.


* Cells are averaged in the following manner:

If the edi t cell/box is: • >2 sensels wide and >2 sensels high, all sensels inside the edit box will be the average value of

the cells that border the box. • ≤2 sensels wide, each sensel value is calculated by averaging the sensels that border the

edit box on the left and right. • ≤2 sensels in height, each sensel value is calculated by averaging the sensels that border the

edit box on the top and bottom. • ≤2 sensels in width and height, the sensels values are calculated by averaging the sensels that

border the edit box on the left and right (edit cells are calculated this way).

Note: The edi t opt ions can also be selected by placing the cursor over the act ive window, clicking the right mouse but ton, and

select ing the desired opt ion, as shown below.

2. Place the cursor at the desired point in the Movie window (a ‘pencil’ symbol will be added to the cursor), and click the left mouse button. A gray edit box or edit cell will be placed at that point.

3. Once an edit box/cell has been placed, it can be moved in the window. Click on any edge of the edit box/cell with the left mouse button, and a four-way arrow will appear. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to move the edit box/cell until it is in the sensor area that you wish to edit.

The dimensions of an edit box may also be changed. Click on one of the eight nodes on the box’s outline, and a two-way arrow will appear. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the node until the edit box outlines the group of sensels that you wish to edit.

Note: The sof tware automatically aligns the edges of edi t boxes and edi t cells wi th the edges of sensor rows and columns.

4. Once you have placed the edit box/cell around the desired sensel(s), the selected edit option will be applied to each of the sensor cell values inside the edit box/cell.

Hint : Using Peak mode allows you to see the ent ire

pressure area while edi t ing; this is especially helpful i f using

Average Cells mode.

5. Select the "View Edit Options & Ranges" checkbox if you want to display the frame range that is affected by the edit cell/box, as well as the type of edit option being applied. The edit range is displayed in the upper right corner of the edit box, as shown below:


This option becomes extremely useful when you are viewing a movie that has multiple frames. You can set up different edit boxes to affect specific frames within the movie. To target a specific number of frames, highlight the edit box with your cursor (the cursor will change to a 4-sided arrow). Then right-click and select "Edit Box/Cell Option & Range."

The following dialog opens where you can change the Edit Box/Cell Options, as well as the frames within the movie which are to be affected by the edit option.

When you select a specific frame range, and click OK, the frame range and edit options are displayed within the right corner of the edit box, as shown below:

Note: The edi t boxes/cells, including all their def ining information (posi t ion and edi t opt ions), can be saved at any t ime before the "Close" but ton is clicked, using the ‘Save Edi t Fi le’ opt ion. This is

helpful i f you would like to perform the same edi ts in another window. Refer to the ‘Load/Save Edi t Fi le’ sect ion for more

information .

6. When you have added all the edit boxes/cells you wish to add, click on the Close button in the Edit Mode dialog box.

Note: Edi t ing the movie in this manner, does not af fect the movie data. You can always delete the edi t boxes/cells at a later t ime.

7. Save the movie, with the edited sensel data, as a new file using the File>>"Save Movie" or "Save Movie As" menu item.

Note: If you forget to save an edi ted recording and at tempt to exi t , the system will warn you that data wi ll be lost unless you save i t .


SAVING/LOADING EDIT FILES When a recording is saved, the data that was created by editing the sensor data is saved with the file. Edit cells/boxes are saved along with a Movie. There is no need to save the edit cells/boxes separately unless you want to import them into another movie at a later date. This can be advantageous if you are going to use the same sensor at a later time. The resulting edit file can then be loaded into a Real-time or Movie window.

Note: Each t ime you open a Real- t ime window which needs the edi t information, you must load the edi t f i le. The sof tware does not remember the previous edi t information when a new Real- t ime window is

opened.

To save an edit file:

1. Once you have placed the edit boxes and/or cells into a Movie or Real-time window, and are satisfied with their placement and option settings, select Save Edit File from the Edit pull-down menu. A "Save As" dialog box will be displayed, and the file can be saved as an edit file (with an *.fed extension).

2. Enter the desired filename and path (location) and click the Save button. The default filename will be the name of the active window (e.g. “Movie1.fed” or “Real-time2.fed”). The edit box/cell information, which includes the coordinates and selected Edit and View Options, will be saved in the file.

Note: All edi t boxes/cells in the act ive window will be saved in the edi t f i le.

To load an edit file:

1. Open a Movie or Real-time window, and then select Load Edit File from the Edit pull-down menu. An "Open" dialog box will be displayed, and edit files (with the extension *.fed only) can be opened. Edit files are only valid for a particular sensor. If you change sensors while an edit file is loaded, you should load an edit file for that sensor, or create a new file.

2. Enter the desired filename and path (location) and click the Open button to load the edit file. When the edit file is loaded, the edit boxes/cells are placed at the same coordinates at which they were saved, with the same properties, and the "Edit Mode" dialog box is opened.


3. Make any necessary changes to the placement and option settings of the loaded edit boxes/cells, then click Close to accept the changes and close the "Edit Mode" dialog box.

Note: This is an extreme example above. For more pract ical purposes, edi t ing cells would probably not be so pronounced. This example is exaggerated to out line the edi t ing process.

CUT FRAMES The Cut Frames option enables you to discard unwanted frames from a recording using a number of methods. This option is helpful for removing nonessential data from movies, and also for making large movie files more manageable.

The three options in the ‘Cut Method’ pull-down field are ‘Cut Frames’, ‘Keep Frames’, and ‘Filtered’. ‘Cut Frames’ allows you to discard specific frames, ‘Keep Frames’ allows you to keep specific frames, and ‘Filtered’ allows you to discard frames whose total applied force is less than a specified minimum value.

To remove frames of data from a movie:

1. Open the movie that you wish to edit. Click on the movie to make it active (edits will only apply to the currently active movie window). Select Cut Frames from the Edit pull-down menu. The ‘Cut Frames’ dialog box will appear.

2. Follow the instructions below for one of the three methods to discard unwanted data (frames) from your movie.


i. ‘Cut Frames’ method:

a) Select ‘Cut Frames’ in the ‘Cut Method’ section of the dialog box.

• To cut a range of frames from the

movie, enter the first (‘First Frame’) and last (‘Last Frame’) frame numbers that you want to remove. The ‘Movie Length’, in number of frames, is listed below these fields.

• To remove frames from the movie at specified intervals (“Comb-Cut”), place a check mark in the ‘Comb’ check box, and then enter a number in the “Cut Every __ Frames” field. Each nth frame will be removed from the movie. For example, if you entered a “3”, every 3rd frame (i.e. the 3rd, 6th, 9th, and so on) would be removed. The comb-cut feature is useful for reducing the number of frames in a movie while retaining the overall pattern.

b) When you are satisfied with your entries, click

on <OK>. The total frame count, in the Movie Status Bar, will be updated to reflect the change. If a graph is open, it will also be updated.

ii. ‘Keep Frames’ method: a) Select ‘Keep Frames’ in the ‘Cut Method’ section of the dialog box.

• To keep a range of frames in the movie, enter the first (‘First Frame’) and last (‘Last Frame’) frame numbers that you want to keep. The ‘Movie Length’, in number of frames, is listed below these fields.


• To keep frames of the movie at specified intervals (“Comb-Keep”), place a check mark in the ‘Comb’ check box, then enter a number in the “Keep Every __ Frames” field. Each nth frame of the movie will be retained. For example, if you entered a “3”, every 3rd frame (i.e. the 3rd, 6th, 9th, and so on) would not be removed. The comb-keep feature is useful for reducing the number of frames in a movie while retaining the overall pattern.

b) When you are satisfied with your entries, click

on <OK>. The total frame count, in the Movie Status Bar, will be updated to reflect the change. If a graph is open, it will also be updated.

iii. ‘Filtered’ method:

a) Select ‘Filtered’ in the ‘Cut Method’ section of

the dialog box (shown here).

b) In the ‘Filter Value’ field, at the bottom of the dialog box, enter the minimum force value (for an entire frame) that you want to keep in the movie. All movie frames in which the total force is less than this value will be removed. This force value will be in the calibrated units of the recording, if a calibration was done; otherwise, they will be Raw units. A number must be typed into this field.


c) When you are satisfied with the selected force value, click on OK. The total frame count in the Movie Status Bar will change to reflect the change. If a graph is open, it will also be updated.

3. Save the movie in order to save the new changes.

Select File --> Save Movie As, and save it under a different file name, if you wish to save the original movie, without the changes.

Note: If you forget to save an edi ted recording and at tempt to exi t , the system will ask i f you want to save the movie (because the movie has changed).


PRINTING The Print function allows you to print the contents of the currently active Movie or Real-time window, including comments, header information, and graphs, to any of the hundreds of printers which MS Windows supports. The window will be printed exactly as it appears on the screen, and will include the options selected in Print Setup.

To print:

1. Select Print Setup from the File menu. Print Setup gives you a number of options on how your printed page will look. Most of the options are standard MS Windows printing options.

2. Select (click on) one or more of the following options, under ‘Content’ at the bottom of the dialog box, to control exactly what will be printed:

• Header: Prints the header information associated with the active window. Header information consists of basic sensor and window information, such as Window title bar name, page numbering, etc.

• Fields: Prints any fields that were entered under Comments in the File pull-down menu. Refer to the ‘Including Comments’ section for more information on entering and changing fields.

• Comments: Prints the comments that were entered under Comments in the File pull-down menu. In addition, if the movie was ‘marked’ with a procedure, the procedure name will be listed in the header information. Refer to the ‘Including Comments’ section for more information on comments.

• View: Prints the contents of the active Movie or Real-time window. If this option is not selected, no sensor data will be printed.

• Mode: Prints additional text to explain functionality. For example, if Peak mode is enabled in the movie/graph, "Analysis Type: Peak" is printed in your output.

• Graph: Prints any graphs that correspond to the active window. When this option is selected, all available graphs (e.g. ‘Graph 1’, ‘Graph 2’) are listed to the right. You can click on the name of the graph to select or deselect it for printing. If a graph doesn’t print, or is not visible in the Print Preview, check all of the Print Setup options.


Hint : If a graph doesn’t print , or is not v isible in the Print Preview, check all of the Print Setup opt ions. If i t st i ll does not print , decrease the size of the printout (enter a

percentage that is less than 100) under ‘Scaling the view’ in Print Setup

• Fit on Page or Scale: These selections are mutually exclusive for a window. If Fit on Page is selected, the size of the image will be set to the largest printable area. If Scale is selected, you may enter the percentage of the actual sensor that is displayed.

Note: The sof tware will automatically rotate an image so i t wi ll print as large as possible.

3. When you are satisfied with the Print Setup, click OK. Select Print Preview from the File menu, to see how your printout will look. Alternately, you can click on the Print Preview icon from the toolbar (below). Next, make any necessary adjustments to the Print Setup.

The following shows the print preview screen


4. Select Print from the File menu, and click OK. If you receive an error message while printing, or printing does not begin in a timely manner, close any Real-time windows and/or stop recording data. If printing does not resume immediately, re-send the print job.

PRINTING GRAYSCALE The TireScan software will also allow you to print the color screen display as a grayscale image. When a grayscale (non-color) printer is installed, and is selected as the default printer (in the Print Setup or Print options in the File menu), the image will be printed in grayscale. In color printouts, the color scale (legend) goes from blue (lowest pressures) to red (highest pressures). The TireScan software does not simply print these colors in black and white, because red and blue will both print out dark and appear to be at the same pressure. When printing grayscale, the software automatically adjusts the Legend to divide the 13 possible pressure ranges into 13 shades of gray, going from light (low pressures) to dark (high pressures). The corresponding pressure areas on the printout of the display window will be adjusted to agree with the Legend. In this way, the pressure differences are much more easily discerned.

Note: This opt ion is intended for grayscale printers, and may not work correct ly i f print ing to a color printer, wi th the ‘print grayscale’ opt ion selected.


TROUBLESHOOTING If your TireScan system is not performing as it should, first check the status of the hardware. To do this, select Hardware Information from the Options pull-down menu. The ‘Hardware Information’ dialog box (shown below) will be displayed.

The Hardware Information dialog box tells you which Receiver (VersaTek or Super-Receiver) is connected between the handle and the computer, and the number of Handles that are connected. Make sure that the correct Receiver(s), and the correct number of handles is detected by the system. If not, check all connections, from the Receiver to the sensor, as well as the power supply (if applicable).

The other information (Address, IRQ Line, and DMA Channel) describes the computer’s internal setup, and is intended primarily for service personnel. If an Interface board is connected to the system, the Address and IRQ Line should be found, but the DMA Channel should not be found (or used).

TROUBLESHOOTING TABLE The following table gives some guidelines for troubleshooting problems with your TireScan system:

Symptoms Probable Cause Action

System boots up with no real-time display

Handle(s) are not connected to PC

Exit Software, connect handle(s) to PC and re-start software

Incorrect map(s) and/or handle(s) selected in ‘Select Sensor’ dialog box.

Select the appropriate map(s) and handle(s) in Options --> Select Sensor.

Software is unable to identify or locate hardware. Contact Tekscan Hot Line for technical assistance.

Spurious contacts appear during recording or in the real-time display.

Broken or damaged sensor. Replace the sensor. The lower limit in the Legend is too low.

Increase the lower limit on the Legend.

EMI of RFI (noise) sources are nearby.

Remove the sources of EMI and/or RFI or relocate the equipment. Check to see that clean power is coming into the PC. Raise the ‘Noise Threshold’ setting under Options --> Acquisition Parameters.

No pressure is indicated in the real-time window when force is applied to the sensor.

Insufficient contact pressure to activate the sensor.

Ensure that the applied load is in the sensor range. Decrease the Legend’s lower limit, or the ‘Noise Threshold’ (Options --> Acquisition Parameters), if necessary.

"Sensor OK" indicator is on.

Alignment may not be correct, even though the ‘Sensor OK’ indicator is lit.

Remove the sensor tab from the handle and reinsert.


An entire row or column will not respond to applied pressure.

Sensor is misaligned. Remove the sensor tab from the handle and reinsert. The terminal section of the sensor is dirty.

Clean the terminal sections of the sensor carefully with a cloth moistened with alcohol.

The incorrect sensor type is being used.

Select the correct sensor type under Options --> Select Sensor.

The sensor is damaged. Replace the sensor.

The sensor is defective. Replace the sensor with a new one. Defective sensors will be replaced free of charge from Tekscan (if unused).

The Real-time Status Bar reads ‘MISALIGNED!’ instead of ‘Sensor OK’.

Sensor is misaligned or was pulled out of the handle. Remove and re-insert sensor.

Sensor is inserted upside down in the handle.

Remove the sensor. Make certain that the This Side UP legend is facing the handle latch.

The terminals on the sensor are dirty.

Clean the terminal sections of the sensor carefully with a cloth moistened with alcohol.

The contact pins of the sensor are dirty.

Cut a clean piece of drawing Mylar the same width as the handle contact area. Insert this strip in the handle and latch. Pull the paper out of the handle. Turn the Mylar over and repeat to clean the other set of contacts.

Two sensors are stuck together. Remove sensors and peel apart. Re-insert one sensor.

Sensor is defective. Replace sensor with a new one. Any defective sensors will be replaced by Tekscan (if unused).

Cable is unplugged or not properly plugged in.

Turn power off and remove handle unit cable from the PC. Check to see if any of the cable connector pins are bent or broken. Carefully reconnect the handle unit cable. Turn the power back on.

Legend appears incorrect when using calibrated sensors.

Incorrect calibration file is being used.

Make certain that the correct calibration file was loaded.

Calibration was performed incorrectly.

Check the saturation pressure in the ‘Calibration’ dialog box (Tools --> Calibration). It should be a reasonable value. If not, perform another calibration.

Computer runs slow, or the hard drive appears to be especially active (as seen by the hard drive LED), even when you are not doing anything.

The system does not have adequate resources (memory) for all of the currently open applications.

Close all applications other than the I-Scan, if possible.

Increase the amount of memory in your computer.

Software gives message, "Cannot start recording".

The software does not have enough available memory to record a movie of the length selected.

Reduce the number of ‘Frames to Record’ in Options --> Acquisition Parameters.

Increase the amount of memory in your computer.


An error is received while printing, or printing doesn't begin in a timely manner.

Printer will not support simultaneous data acquisition and printing.

Close any real-time windows and/or stop recording data. If printing doesn't resume immediately, re-send the print job.

Contents or Search button under Help menu does not open the Help File.

Known Issue.

Close the Tekscan Application. Right-click on the Tekscan Shortcut icon (application icon in the start menu or on the desktop), and select Properties. Navigate to the “Shortcut” tab, and click on the Find Target button. The Tekscan executable is found and highlighted. Double click this executable file to open the application. You should now be able to access the help file via Help --> Contents or Help --> Search from within the application. Note: This should re-establish the link between the Help File and the Application, and you should only have to perform this procedure once. If the link becomes broken once again, and you cannot access the Help File, perform the previous procedure once again.

Tekscan, Inc. will provide technical assistance for any difficulties you may experience using your TireScan system. Write, call or fax us with any concerns or questions. Our knowledgeable support staff will be happy to assist you.

Tekscan Technical Support can be reached between 8:30 and 7:00pm EST by calling: (617)-464-4500 or (800)-248-3669 in the US and Canada

Or at anytime via fax or email: Fax: (617)-464-4266

E-mail: [email protected]


TIRESCAN SENSORS & SENSOR MAPS

Each Tekscan TireScan sensor design or model has a unique “map”, or software “driver”, that enables it to operate and display on the screen correctly. The “map” tells the Tekscan Pressure Display and Analysis Software what the proper electrical resistances are, how to read and display the sensor data, and enables the sensor to work properly when it is connected to the Tekscan electronics. To use a particular sensor, you must license the sensor “map” software for that sensor.

When you purchase a Tekscan system, you will receive a number of sensors and their associated sensor “map(s).” Additional sensors and “maps” can be purchased at any time and added to your system as your requirements change.

A visual layout of each sensor is provided in this Appendix. Most sensors are 0.004” (0.10 mm) thick and consist of a large array, or grid, of independent sensing cells (elements or sensels). Sensors are available in various sizes, shapes, and pressure ranges.

AVAILABLE SENSORS Sensors are referred to by their model number, which is the same as their “map” number. The following sensor models are currently available for TireScan systems:

Model (Map) Number

Description Connection Number of Handles Required Notes

Map 5026 Tread Element CH-T 2 (1 Dual Set) or 2 VersaTek Map 7100 5mm MAT CH-T 2 (1 Dual Set) or 2 VersaTek Map 7101 5mm MAT CH-T 2 (1 Dual Set) or 2 VersaTek Replaces the 7100

sensor Map 7501 Tread Element CH-T 2 (1 Dual Set) or 2 VersaTek Map 8000 3mm MAT CH-T 2 (1 Dual Set) or 2 VersaTek Map 8050 1.3mm MAT CH-T 8 (4 Dual Sets) or 8 VersaTek Map 8100 Tire Bead T 1 Evolution or VersaTek Map 8110 Tire Bead T 1 Evolution or VersaTek Map 8150 Tire Bead T 1 Evolution or VersaTek Map 8155 Tire Bead T 1 Evolution or VersaTek Map 8400 1.5mm MAT CH-T 4 VersaTek Map 8405 1.0mm MAT CH-T 6 VersaTek

Maps for Large Sensing Areas (Virtual Sensor Maps) Tekscan also has the ability to create and display a “virtual sensor” through the use of its Virtual Systems Architecture (VSA). VSA is a very useful tool when a customer would like to use a larger sensing surface than a single sensor can provide. The output from the multiple sensors is displayed on the screen as if it was a single sensor when using VSA maps. The following VSA maps are available for the TireScan software, but virtually any sensor combination or orientation can be displayed as a virtual sensor. The next few pages show the physical layout and orientation of these virtual sensors.


Map 7100D Map 7100D-2 Map 7100D-3 Map 7100D-4 Map 7100Q Map 7100Q-3 Map 7100Q-4 Map 7100QL Map 7101D Map 7101D-2 Map 7100D-3 Map 7100D-4 Map 7101Q Map 7101Q-3 Map 7101Q-4 Map 7101Q-5 Map 7101QL Map 7101TL Map 8000D Map 8000D-2 Map 8000Q Map 8000QL Map 8050Q Map 8050Q-2

The user must connect the correct number of data scanning handles to the system to use the Virtual Sensor map. The output from multiple sensors is then shown in a single “virtual” real-time or playback window. The VSA map’s pressure data appears in a real-time window in the Tekscan software and its output is stored as a single file. Even if not shown here, Tekscan can custom program any sensor layout or sensor orientation specified by the customer.


Sensor Map Layouts This section provides information on TireScan sensor map Layouts.

MAP 5026


MAP 7100


MAP 7101 Application Examples:

• High resolution mat for barefoot analysis • Tire foot prints and fuel cells

Special Features: • Requires DUAL Handles or 2 VersaTek Handles • External vents


MAP 7501


MAP 8000


MAP 8050


MAP 8100

Application Examples: • Tire beads • Corner of car door seals

Special Features: • Internal vent


MAP 8110

Application Example: • Aircraft tire beads

Special Features: • Internal vents


MAP 8150

Application Example: • Large truck tire beads

Special Features: • Internal and external vents


MAP 8155

Application Example: • Large truck tire beads and molds

Special Features: • External vents


MAP 8400


Map 8405


Virtual Sensor Map Layouts This section provides information on TireScan sensor map Layouts.

MAP 7100D The diagram below illustrates the layout of the two 7100 sensors comprising the 7100D Virtual Sensor Map. Two pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The two handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.

Note: All sensors are oriented with “This Side UP” logo facing upwards.


MAP 7100D-2 The diagram below illustrates the layout of the two 7100 sensors comprising the 7100D-2 Virtual Sensor Map. Two pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The two handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.



MAP 7100D-3 This is a guide for the setup of the 7100D-3 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the two sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top edge. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. 3 blank columns within the map separate the 195 columns between the sensors. The sensors should butt end to end without any overlap. Two pairs of Dual Handles and One Super Receiver will be necessary for this setup.



MAP 7100D-4 This is a guide for the setup of the 7100D-4 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the two sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top and bottom edges. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 178 rows between the sensors are separated by 4 blank rows within the map. The sensors should butt end to end without overlap.

Two pairs of Dual Handles and One Super Receiver will be necessary for this setup.



MAP 7100Q The diagram below illustrates the layout of the four 7100 sensors comprising the 7100Q Virtual Sensor Map. Four pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The four handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.



MAP 7100Q-3 This is a guide for the setup of the 7100Q-3 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the four sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top and bottom edges. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 178 rows between the sensors are separated by 4 blank rows within the map. The 195 columns between the sensors are also separated by 3 blank columns. The sensors should butt end to end without overlap. Four pairs of Dual Handles and Two Super Receivers will be necessary for this setup.



MAP 7100Q-4 This is a guide for the setup of the 7100Q-4 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the four sensors until the tabs are oriented along the left and right edges. Tab B of the first sensor will be near the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. 4 blank columns within the map separate the 178 columns between the sensors. The 195 rows between the sensors are also separated by 3 blank rows. The sensors should butt end to end without overlap. Four pairs of Dual Handles and Two Super Receivers will be necessary for this setup.



Map 7100QL The diagram below illustrates the layout of the four 7100 sensors comprising the 7100QL Virtual Sensor Map. Four pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The four handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.



Map 7101D This is a guide for the setup of the 7101D sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the two sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top edge. Tab A of the first sensor will be near the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 88 rows and 192 columns between the sensors are continuous and should have no separation between the sensors or the software display. The sensor perimeters should be overlapped with shims. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.


Map 7101D-2 This is a guide for the setup of the 7101D-2 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 176 rows and 88 columns between the sensors are continuous and should have no separation between the sensors or the software display. The sensor perimeters should be overlapped with shims. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen. One pair of Dual Handles and One Super Receiver will be necessary for this setup. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc.


Map 7101D-3 This is a guide for the setup of the 7101D-3 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the two sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top edge. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 195 columns between the sensors are separated by 3 blank columns within the map. The sensors should butt end to end without overlap. Two pairs of Dual Handles and One Super Receiver will be necessary for this setup. Examine header pins H1, H2, H3 and H4 on the Super Receiver. Make sure that the jumper has been placed across pins 2 and 3 for Dual Handle capability on all channels. This should have been done by default, otherwise the software will not recognize the handles. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc.


Map 7101D-4 This is a guide for the setup of the 7101D-4 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the two sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top and bottom edges. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 178 rows between the sensors are separated by 2 blank rows within the map. The sensors should butt end to end without overlapping. Two pairs of Dual Handles and One Super Receiver will be necessary for this setup. Examine header pins H1, H2, H3 and H4 on the Super Receiver. Make sure that the jumper has been placed across pins 2 and 3 for Dual Handle capability on all channels. This should have been done by default, otherwise the software will not recognize the handles. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc.


Map 7101Q This is a guide for the setup of the 7101Q sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the four sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top and bottom edges. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 176 rows and 192 columns across the four sensors are continuous and should have no separation between the sensors or the software display. The sensor perimeters should be overlapped with shims.

Four pairs of Dual Handles and Two Super Receivers will be necessary for this setup. Examine header pins H1, H2, H3 and H4 on the Super Receivers. Make sure that the jumper has been placed across pins 2 and 3 for Dual Handle capability on all channels. This should have been done by default, otherwise the software will not recognize the handles. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc. The second Super Receiver will start with Tab E.


Map 7101Q-3 This is a guide for the setup of the 7101Q-3 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the four sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top and bottom edges. Tab A of the first sensor will be in the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 178 rows between the sensors are separated by 2 blank rows within the map. The 195 columns between the sensors are also separated by 3 blank columns. The sensors should butt end to end without overlap.

Four pairs of Dual Handles and Two Super Receivers will be necessary for this setup. Examine header pins H1, H2, H3 and H4 on the Super Receivers. Make sure that the jumper has been placed across pins 2 and 3 for Dual Handle capability on all channels. This should have been done by default, otherwise the software will not recognize the handles. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc. The second Super Receiver will start with Tab E.


Map 7101Q-4 This is a guide for the setup of the 7101Q-4 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the four sensors until the tabs are oriented along the left and right edges. Tab B of the first sensor will be near the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 178 columns between the sensors are separated by 2 blank columns within the map. The 195 rows between the sensors are also separated by 3 blank rows. The sensors should butt end to end without overlap. Four pairs of Dual Handles and Two Super Receivers will be necessary for this setup. Examine header pins H1, H2, H3 and H4 on the Super Receivers. Make sure that the jumper has been placed across pins 2 and 3 for Dual Handle capability on all channels. This should have been done by default, otherwise the software will not recognize the handles. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc. The second Super Receiver will start with Tab E.


Map 7101Q-5 This is a guide for the setup of the 7101Q-5 sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the four sensors until the tabs are oriented along the left and right edges. Tab B of the first sensor will be near the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 176 columns and 192 rows between the sensors are continuous and should have no separation between the sensors or the software display. The sensor perimeters should be overlapped with shims. Four pairs of Dual Handles and Two Super Receivers will be necessary for this setup. Examine header pins H1, H2, H3 and H4 on the Super Receivers. Make sure that the jumper has been placed across pins 2 and 3 for Dual Handle capability on all channels. This should have been done by default, otherwise the software will not recognize the handles. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc. The second Super Receiver will start with Tab E.


Map 7101QL This is a guide for the setup of the 7101QL sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the four sensors until the tabs are oriented along the left edge. Tab B of the first sensor will be near the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 88columns and 384 rows between the sensors are continuous and should have no separation between the sensors or the software display. The sensor perimeters should be overlapped with shims. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen. Four pairs of Dual Handles and Two Super Receivers will be necessary for this setup. Examine header pins H1, H2, H3 and H4 on the Super Receivers. Make sure that the jumper has been placed across pins 2 and 3 for Dual Handle capability on all channels. This should have been done by default, otherwise the software will not recognize the handles. The Super Receiver may have the Handle Ports labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. Handle A is plugged into Port 1, and Handle B is plugged into Port 2, etc. The second Super Receiver will start with Tab E.


Map 7101TL This is a guide for the setup of the 7101TL sensor layout with the sensor and handle arrangement shown below. The real-time window within the Tekscan software will correspond to what is depicted, and the sensors should be placed right side up. The “This Side Up” icons should be readable. Rotate the three sensors until the tabs are oriented along the top edge. Tab A of the first sensor will be near the upper left corner. The origin (0, 0) will also occur at the upper-left corner of the real-time window. The 88 rows and 288 columns between the sensors are continuous and should have no separation between the sensors or the software display. The sensor perimeters should be overlapped with shims. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.


MAP 8000D The diagram below illustrates the layout of the two 8000 sensors comprising the 8000D Virtual Sensor Map. Two pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The two handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.



MAP 8000D-2 The diagram below illustrates the layout of the two 8000 sensors comprising the 8000D-2 Virtual Sensor Map. Two pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The two handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.



MAP 8000Q The diagram below illustrates the layout of the four 8000 sensors comprising the 8000Q Virtual Sensor Map. Four pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The four handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.



MAP 8000QL The diagram below illustrates the layout of the four 8000 sensors comprising the 8000QL Virtual Sensor Map. Four pairs of Dual handles are required to use this map. The four handle pairs selected in the open Real-time Window, in the TireScan software, are connected to the tabs with the same name, as shown below. The gray area is the active area of the sensors and represents the Real-time data window when it is oriented normally. The software may rotate the window 90 degrees clockwise for a better fit on the screen.



MAP 8050Q


MAP 8050Q-2


Diagnostic Map Layouts The main purpose of these diagnostic maps is to troubleshoot the Handles, ensuring they are working correctly.

To open a window with the entire area of the 8400 sensor, all 4 handles must be connected to the sensor and recognized by the TireScan software. In the event that problems occur with any of the handles, it may be necessary to troubleshoot the system by testing the handles individually. For this purpose we have provided the VM8400 diagnostic maps. These maps allow a real-time window to be opened when only one of the VersaTek handles is recognized by the software. The maps display the pressure output from a smaller area of the 8400 sensor. The location of this area within the sensor will depend on the tab to which the handle is connected. The diagrams in this section show which sensor areas are associated with each tab.

The VM8400 diagnostic maps can be used to confirm that the remaining 3 handles are working properly when one handle develops a problem. They can also be used to isolate each handle to determine whether missing rows or columns are present.

Note: When using this diagnost ic maps, the pressure output wi ll be higher than when using the 8400 sensor map and 4 mult iplexed handles. These maps should only be used for diagnost ic

purposes and not for actual data collect ion.

Map VM8400-A


Map VM8400-B


Map VM8400-C

Note: When using this diagnost ic map, enable the "Flip Rows" feature by clicking on i ts icon on the Toolbar (shown below).


Map VM8400-D

Note: When using this diagnost ic map, enable the "Flip Rows" feature by clicking on i ts icon on the Toolbar (shown below).


The following are optional add-ons to your current Tekscan System. For more detailed information, please reference your Help File located under

the Help menu in your software or contact [email protected].

Optional Accessories to your Tekscan System

mailto:[email protected]�


The Video Synchronization™ software is available as an optional add-on to Tekscan's pressure and force measurement system. Video Synch software allows you to record video sequences and synchronize them with your pressure data. The video, the pressure profiles, and/or the graphs (pressure, force, etc.) can then be simultaneously viewed in the Tekscan software, which truly gives you the whole picture!

Video Synchronization™ Add-On Video Synchronization Software

Benefits: • See the position/event (i.e machine state) alongside the pressure pattern • Improved understanding when video is combined with pressure data • Turnkey: requires no external video capture programs • Enhanced data analysis • Enables pressure and video data collection • Saves time


The TS-100 box is used to generate an external trigger to be transmitted to the Tekscan software. Upon activation, the Tekscan Trigger-synch sends a signal that is received by Tekscan software to trigger recording. This can be used to synchronize data captured by external devices (such as force plates, digital and analog video, EMG and similar devices) with the timestamp created on each frame of Tekscan data.

External Trigger Synch Add-On Triggering Device

Usage: • The trigger switch can be used by hand to trigger a recording. • External devices (such as an electric eye or light beam) can be connected to

generate input that will trigger recording in the software. • External devices can be connected to receive output from the trigger box for

other data gathering purposes. The TS-100 generates a single pulse to connected devices when the triggering event occurs.


This optional software package includes three additional analysis options: Add Polygon, Add Blob, and the Tracking Box.

Additional Advanced Analysis Add-Ons Polygon/Blob/Tracking Box

Tracking Box

Blob

Polygon

Tracking Box: • The Tracking Box feature allows you

to add a box to the Movie or Real-time window that will “track,” or follow, the loaded sensels in the window.

Polygon: • Add Polygon feature allows you to add

a custom-shaped box to a real-time or movie window.

Blob: • The Add Blob feature enables you to

study a group of loaded sensels separately from the rest of the active window.

• While a Polygon will allow you to study an irregularly shaped area, the Blob will allow you to study only the



Synchronization Pulse As an option, Tekscan software can be set up to generate a signal synchronized to the recording of frames. This signal is outgoing from the software to be captured by an external recording device, and may be used to synchronize external devices to the recording of movies.

NOTE: the Synchronizing Pulse cannot be used concurrent ly wi th the Tekscan TS-100 Trigger Box because the TS-100 occupies the ent ire serial (COM) port .

The pulse is a square wave with the same frequency as the recording. The amplitude is the same as the serial port voltage, generally +/- 5 to +/- 15 volts. The synchronization (‘synch’) signal is available on the RTS pin of the selected serial port, and is at RS-232 voltage levels. The circuit shown above may be used to convert the sync. signal to TTL levels. The rising edge of the synch pulse indicates that the most recent frame is being loaded into PC memory. The falling edge of the signal indicates that all of the data has been received from the sensor.

Note: There is a slight t ime delay between the actual capture of a frame and the generat ion of the synch pulse. This t ime delay is on the order of microseconds and is dependent on the clock speed of the computer.

Enabling the External Synch Signal To enable the External Synch signal, do the following:

1. Select Acquisition Parameters from the Options pull-down menu. This will bring up the Data Acquisition Parameters dialog box.


2. Click in the check box to Generate External Synch Signal.

3. To the right of the Generate External Synch Signal check box is a list of COM (serial) ports available for external synch/triggering. Click on the down arrow, and select the desired serial (COM) port from the list of those that are available. This will generate an external synch pulse when recording is begun via the selected serial port. If a COM port is unavailable (because it is in use), it will be grayed out. The software will remember the selected COM port across patient sessions.

Note: Changing the External Synch Signal COM (serial) port automatically changes the ports used for external triggering, since they must always use the same serial port .


Automatic Sequential Recording The ASR (Automatic Sequential Recording) feature allows you to set up your system to automatically start a new recording when the current one is complete, without the need to manually open new real-time windows and start new recordings. When the ASR feature is in effect, the software automatically saves and closes the current movie, opens a new Real-time window, and begins a new recording. This will continue until recording is stopped or the total frame count for the movie is reached. The ASR feature is useful for very long recordings, which may exceed the limitations on the number of frames a single movie can contain. The resulting recordings will be continuous, with only short gaps between when the current movie is saved, and the new recording is started. If triggering is used to start recording, each movie is separately triggered.

To enable Automatic Sequential Recording:

1. Select Acquisition Parameters from the Options pull-down menu. This brings up the ‘Data Acquisition Parameters’ dialog box.

2. Check ‘Enable ASR’ box in the Start Options area of the dialog box. This will make the ASR button available.

3. Click the ASR button. This brings up the ‘ASR Settings’ dialog box (below).

4. Enter either the desired Number of Movies or the desired Total Number of Frames in the appropriate field. If the Number of Movies is entered, the Total Number of Frames will be automatically calculated based on the Acquisition Parameters set in the ‘Data Acquisition Parameters’ dialog box. If the Total Number of Frames is entered, the Number of Movies will be automatically calculated. Acceptable ranges for Number of Movies and Total Number of Frames are listed in parentheses. If there is not enough memory available for the desired number of recordings, more memory can be freed up by closing other software programs that may be running.

5. In the ‘Movie Destination’ field, select the Movie Destination directory. This is the directory where the movies will be stored until recording is complete. Also enter the name of the file you would like to use for the movies. By default, the movies will be saved to the directory in which the TireScan software is installed, and the movies will be named “Movie0001.fsx”, “Movie0002.fsx”, etc. To change the directory or the movie name, type them into the ‘Movie Destination’ field or click the ‘Browse’ button to search for the directory.

6. Enter the number that you want to be assigned to the first movie file in the ‘Start Frame Number’ field. Select the number label for the first movie to be recorded. By default, the first movie recorded will be movie number 1. If you wish to use a different number, enter it into this field. For example, if you enter “20”, the first movie will be named “Movie0020.fsx”, and any subsequent movies will be numbered sequentially.

7. When you are satisfied with your selections, click ‘OK’ to return to the ‘Data Acquisition Parameters’ dialog box. Click ‘OK’ to return to the main software window.

8. Begin recording. If triggering is in selected, each movie will be triggered individually. Each recording will be stopped when any of the following occurs: the ‘Total Number of Frames’ is reached, the ‘Frames to Record’ (Data Acquisition Parameters) is reached, the stop trigger event is reached, or the destination directory’s hard disk space is full. You can stop recording, and the ASR function, at any time by pressing the Stop button, and no new recording will be started.

9. To review movies that have been recorded using the ASR feature, open movies in the same way you would open any other *.fsx file, by selecting ‘Open’ from the File pull-down menu.


Tekscan API 2 Usage

Tekscan software with the API2 option enabled will be able to export its real-time data/image, saved snapshot image file names and other pressure related data to the client software written by the User.

If you purchased this additional capability, the API 2 files can be found within the Samples folder on your Installation CD. There is a file called FsxCom_sample.zip, which, when extracted will provide access to the sample program, as well as the source code.

The detailed listing of what a client can do with this API is set as follows.

The API can export the pressure data in the following methods:

• Client requests for the continuing real-time data in the form of either text or image format, and provide the receiving address on the client side for the server to send over the data. The server will send the data over at the indicated address as soon as the data is generated.

• Client requests to get the current frame of pressure data. This is one time action during which the client sends over the request along with the data buffer on which the server will copy the pressure data of the current frame in the text format (ASCII).

• Client requests to get the saved file from the server. The data on the saved file can be snapshots of the current pressure view in 2-D or 3-D, or the graph views such as the pressure profile graph, TAM /STAM graph/table, or the current legend of the pressure. The server sends over the full path file name to the client.

Other auxiliary functions included in this API set are:

• Getting names of the opening windows (view), • Getting current units of size and force, • Getting the size of indicated pressure view in pixels, • Getting the size of each pixel in the pressure view, etc.

All API calls are based on the Microsoft COM technique and made into the executable of the Tekscan software. Currently, the API2 supports only V-table interface and Automation (i.e. IDispatch::Invoke) is not supported at this time.

There are two samples supplied in this package with source code. The first sample is FsxUser, which is a stand alone executable. The second sample is a dynamic link library (DLL). The DLL can be loaded into a customer’s software as a convenient bridge for graphing and transferring the sensor data from the software to the client’s software.

The provided client sample code is built by using Microsoft compiler Visual C++ 6.0 and is only tested by Visual C++ 6.0. The usages of the two samples are explained later.

Although the API is built upon the MS COM technique, the user without COM knowledge can still be able to use the API, as the sample code is reusable and thus can be copied and pasted onto the client’s source code.

1. Configure the Server 1. First, the customer must have the API2 option turned on in order to obtain the data exporting service.

2. Next, run “Iscan.exe/regserver” at the command line to register this server. Usually this procedure is done during the software installation.

3. Lastly, this package will also provide a proxy/stub dll file (fsxproxy.dll) for marshaling interfaces. Run “regsvr32path\fsxproxy.dll” at the Start ->Run. This procedure is also done during the server software installation.


2. Build a Client Software Files needed:

• Source code: fsx.h fsx_i.c.

• DLL File: fsxproxy.dll

The client will need API interface definition file (fsx.h) and CLSID file (fsx_i.c) provided in the source files in order to get the information about the server.

For each client machine, i.e., any machine on which a client runs the software should have fsxproxy.dll file copied on it and have it registered. This DLL acts as the interface marshaling proxy and unmarshalling stub.

If the client wants the server to export the real-time data, the client has to implement the fixed Interface ICallClient, create an object of the Interface ICallClient, and hand the object to the server to let it know where to send the captured data back once it is available. This package also includes a client sample program for customer programming reference.

3. Running the Client from a Separate Machine Auxiliary files needed:

fsxproxy.dll Tekcom.reg.

Note: You may also need dcm95cfg.exe.

Nothing should be changed on the server machine for the remote access.

On the client machine, complete the following steps:

1. Follow the third step in section 1, “Configure the Server”.

2. Install the enclosed registry file named TekCOM.reg. Before the installation, the entry "RemoteServerName" in this file must be edited to the server machine's address or name such as "169.215.93.5" or "Dave". After the entry has been added, double click the registry file name to let the operation system do the registration.

3. Complete the DCOM configuration as stated below.

4. Run the server program first.

4. Configure the Microsoft Distributed COM Securities Use these configurations only when the client and the server run on separate machines.

When configuring the DCOM security properties, make sure both the machines authorize the other the rights connect to each other. The following is an example of correct authorization:

1. First, if running on Windows 95/98/2000/ME, run the included dcm95cfg.exe to install Microsoft’s DCOM configuration utility. At the Start ->Run, type “dcomcnfg” and click OK. For Windows XP, use Component Services to complete the DCOM configuration.


2. Second, select page Default Properties, then:

• Check Enable Distributed COM on this computer. If this option is unchecked, the remote running ability is disabled.

• In Default Authentication Level the default level is Connect (shown below). If Connect is selected, both the client and server have Grant Access to each other (described in next section). This level is recommended for this application.

• The default Impersonation Level is set to Identify and is also the recommended level for this application.

On the server machine, check the Enable Remote Connection.

• Click the Edit Default and add the access permission for the client (shown below).

• On the client machine, complete the last step to give access permission for the server.

5. API Definitions The following functions will return type HRESULT values. A returned 0 value means successful; non-zero value means unsuccessful. The error messages can be obtained by using GetErrorMessage() if the client can pass the returned error code.

GetOpenedWindowNames ()

• Description: Asks the server to send the specified opening child windows' names and their number. The names are stored inside a char string separated by "\r\n".

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP GetOpenedWindowNames(int* pSize, unsigned char* pWindows, int* pWinNumber,WINDOWTYPE eType);

• Arguments:

• pSize [in, out] A pointer to an integer containing the size of the passed in and out buffer pWindows for the window's names. Each window's name is separated by two chars "\r\n". Must not be 0.


• pWindows [out] Pointer to a buffer to bring out the window's names of specified type. If no window is found, a null value will be transferred out.

• pWinNumber [out] Pointer to an integer to bring out the number of opening windows. It will zero when there is no real time opening.

• eType [in] The type of the specified child windows. The available types are:

REAL_TIME: Real-time windows. MOVIE: Recorded movies. REAL_MOVIE: Real-time and recorded movies. GRAPH: Graphs for real time and recorded movies. TAM_GRAPH: Graphs for TAM. TAM_TABLE: Tables for TAM. ALL_WINDOWS: All the opened windows.

GetFrameData()

• Description: Uses a window name obtained from GetOpenedWindowNames() and sends a request to the Tekscan software (server) to copy the raw frame data of the indicated window to the passed in array. The window’s type can either be real-time or movie. Only the raw data will be copied over regardless whether the server has been calibrated or not.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP GetFrameData(int c_WinSize, unsigned char* pWindow, BYTE cEquil, int* pSizeInOut, unsigned char* pData);

• Arguments:

• c_WinSize [in] The size of the passed in window’s name in string pWindow. Must not be 0.

• pWindow [in] A pointer to the passed in buffer containing the indicating window’s name. Must not be null.

• cEquil [in] Flag specifies whether the client wants the equilibrated data or not. Larger than zero is yes, zero is no. If no equilibration has applied on the server software, the copied data is unequilibrated.

• pSizeInOut [in, out] A pointer to an integer for the size of the passed in array buffer and the size of the copied data size on this buffer to be passed out.

• pData [in, out] A pointer to an unsigned char buffer to carry out the frame data. The out data is in byte units.

Note: This call is only avai lable to the window types REAL_TIME, MOVIE and/or REAL_MOVIE.


GetCalFrameData()

• Description: Uses a window name obtained from GetOpenedWindowNames() and sends a request to the Tekscan software (server) to copy the calibrated frame data of the indicated window to the passed in array. If no calibration is available, the raw data will be copied over. The window’s types can either be real-time or movie.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP GetCalFrameData(int c_WinSize, unsigned char* pWindow, BYTE cEquil, int* pSizeInOut,float* pfData);

• Arguments:

• c_WinSize [in] The size of the passed in window’s name in string pWindow. Must not be 0.

• pWindow [in] A pointer to the passed in buffer containing the indicating window’s name. Must not be null.

• cEquil [in] Flag specifies whether the client wants the equilibrated data or not. Larger than zero is yes, zero is no. If no equilibration has applied on the server software, the copied data is unequilibrated.

• pSizeInOut [in, out] A pointer to an integer for the size of the passed in array buffer and the size of the copied data size on this buffer to be passed out

• pfData [in, out] A pointer to a float array buffer to carry out the calibrated frame data. The unit of the data is the same as the chosen one in the Tekscan software.

Note: This call is only avai lable to the window types REAL_TIME, MOVIE and/or REAL_MOVIE.

RequestRealTimeData()

• Description: Sets the callback hook by passing a callback pointer to an object created inside the client and the server window's name obtained through server's GetOpenedWindowNames() routine. Once it is set successfully, the client will receive each frame’s captured data once it is available from the named real-time or recording window in the server. The server sends the data by using the passed callback pointer.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP RequestRealTimeData(ICallClient* pCallback, int c_Size, unsigned char* pWindow, BYTE cEquil);

• Arguments:

• pCallback [in] A pointer to an object of Interface ICallClient, must not be null.

• c_Size [in] The size of the passed in window's name in string pWindow. Must not be 0.


• pWindow [in] The window's name string obtained through GetOpenedWindowNames(). Must not be null.

• cEquil [in] Flag specifies whether the client wants the equilibration or not. Larger than zero is yes, zero is no. If no equilibration has applied on the server software, the copied data is unequilibrated.

Note: To disconnect the callback hook, use Deact ivateCallback(). To let the server stop sending data back while st i ll keeping the callback hook, use StopCallbackTransfer(). If this call is successful, the server wi ll

send back the real- t ime data through the callback funct ion call OnRTDataReady() of interface CCallClient .

RequestCalRealTimeData()

• Description: Sets the callback hook by passing a callback pointer to an object created inside the client and the server window’s name obtained through server’s GetOpenedWindowNames() routine. Once it is set successfully, the client will receive each calibrated frame data once it is available from the named real-time or recording window in the server. The server sends the data by using the passed callback pointer. If the calibration is not available, the raw data will be passed over.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP RequestCalRealTimeData(ICallClient* pCallback, int c_Size, unsigned char* pWindow, BYTE cEquil);

• Arguments:


• c_Size [in] The size of the passed in window’s name in string pWindow. Must not be 0.

• pWindow [in] The window’s name string obtained through GetOpenedWindowNames(). Must not be null.

• cEquil [in] Flag specifies whether the client wants the equilibration or not. Larger than zero is yes, zero is no. If no equilibration has applied on the server software, the copied data is unequilibrated.


send back the real- t ime data through the callback funct ion call OnRTDataReady() of interface CCallClient .

RequestRealTimeImage()

• Description: Sets the callback hook by passing a callback pointer to an object created inside the client and the server window's name obtained through server's GetOpenedWindowNames() routine. Once it is set successfully, the client will receive image type data once it is available from the named real-time or recording window in the server. The server sends the data by using the passed callback pointer.


• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP RequestRealTimeImage (ICallClient* pCallback, int c_Size, unsigned char* pWindow);

• Arguments:


• c_Size [in] The size of the passed in window’s name in string pWindow. Must not be 0.

• pWindow [in] The window’s name string obtained through GetOpenedWindowNames(). Must not be null.


send back the bi tmap data through the callback funct ion call OnRTBitmapReady() of interface CCallClient .

DeactivateCallback()

• Description: Disconnects the callback hook set previously by using RequestRealTimeData or RequestRealTimeImage. By calling this function, both the client and server remove the memory of the callback pointer and the previously indicated real time window's name.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP DeactivateCallback(int c_Size, unsigned char* pWindow);

• Arguments: • c_Size

[in] The size of the passed in window's name in string pWindow. Must not be 0. • pWindow

[in] The real-time window's name string. Must not be null. StopCallbackTransfer()

• Description: Asks the server to stop sending back the capture frame data while still keeping the callback connection.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP StopCallbackTransfer(int c_Size, unsigned char* pWindow);

• Arguments:


• pWindow [in] The real-time window's name string. Must not be null.


Note: To ask the server to resume the data transfer, just call the RequestRealTimeData or RequestRealTimeImage

GetCurrentSizePresssureUnits()

• Description: Get the given real-time window's units of length and pressure. The named window may or may not calibrated. If not calibrated, the pressure will always be "raw", if calibrated, the pressure be any unit set by the server. The length unit will be the one set by the server.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP GetCurrentSizePresssureUnits(int c_WinSize, unsigned char* pWindow, int* pUnitSize, unsigned char* pSizePressUnits);

• Arguments:

• c_WinSize [in] The size of the passed in window's name in string pWindow. Must not be 0.

• pWindow [in] A pointer to the passed in buffer containing the indicating window's name. Must not be null.

• pUnitSize [in, out] A pointer to an integer for the size of the passed in buffer and the size of the passed out string containing the indicated window's units.

• pSizePressUnits [out] A pointer to a buffer for getting the length and pressure units of the indicated real-time window. The two units are separated with two chars "\r\n".

GetWindowMapSize()

• Description: Ask the server to give the map size of the indicated real-time window. The size will be in row and column numbers.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP GetWindowMapSize(int c_Size, unsigned char* pWindow, int* pRow, int* pCol);

• Arguments:



• pRow [out] A pointer to an integer for the passed out row number. Must not be null.

• pCol [out] A pointer to an integer for the passed out column number. Must not be null.


GetWindowPixelSize()

• Description: Asks the server to give the map pixel size. The size units will be displayed in the current server's unit.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP GetWindowPixelSize(int c_Size, unsigned char* pWindow, float* pXSize, float* pYSize);

• Arguments:



• pXSize [out] A pointer to an integer for the passed out pixel's horizontal size. Must not be null.

• pYSize [out] A pointer to an integer for the passed out pixel's vertical size. Must not be null.

GetErrorMessage()

• Description: For a given error code, the server will give the meaning of the error code, or the error message. If the returned value is 0, the server will not give the message since it is a successful code.

• Function Prototype: STDMETHODIMP GetErrorMessage(int c_Error, int* pBuffSize, unsigned char* pMessage);

• Arguments:

• c_Error [in] An integer indicating the error code.

• pBuffSize [in, out] A pointer to an integer for the size of the passed in buffer and the size of the passed out string containing the error message.

• pMessage [out] A pointer to a string buffer for carrying out the error message.

GetWindowSnapShotInfo()

Description: Creates multiple image files a text file for the current selected window and output the full path names of the files. The text file contains the ACSII format of the current view data in raw unit. The image file format can be selectable. The path of the files is in the windows/temp sub-directory. The client is responsible for deleting these files once they have been copied or processed.


Function Prototype:

STDMETHODIMP GetWindowSnapShotInfo (

int c_SizeWindow, unsigned char* pWindow, int c_Size2dViewFileName, unsigned char* p2dViewFileName, int c_Size2dCtViewFileName, unsigned char* p2dCtViewFileName, int c_Size3dViewFileName, unsigned char* p3dViewFileName, int c_SizeLegendFileName, unsigned char* pLegendFileName, float* pArea, float* pForce, float* pMinPress, float* pMaxPress, IMAGETYPE eImageType, int c_SizeASCIIFileName, unsigned char* pASCIIFileName

);

Arguments:

c_SizeWindow [in] The size of the passed in window’s name in string pWindow. Must not be 0.

pWindow [in] A pointer to the passed in buffer containing the indicated window’s name. Must not be null.

c_Size2dViewFileName [in] The size of the passed in buffer p2dViewFileName for getting the image file name.

p2dViewFileName [out] A pointer to a string buffer for carrying out the image file name for the 2-D view.

c_Size2dCtViewFileName [in] The size of the passed in buffer p2dcCtViewFileName for getting the image file name.

p2dCtViewFileName [out] A pointer to a string buffer for carrying out the image file name for the 2-D contour view. Optional. Can be NULL.

c_Size3dViewFileName [in] The size of the passed in buffer p3dViewFileName for getting the image file name.

p3dViewFileName [out] A pointer to a string buffer for carrying out the image file name for the 3-D view. Optional. Can be NULL.

c_SizeLegendFileName [in] The size of the passed in buffer pLegendFileName for getting the image file name.

pLegendFileName [out] A pointer to a string buffer for carrying out the image file name for the legend.


pArea [out] A pointer to a float for carrying out the contact area. Optional. Can be NULL.

pForce [out] A pointer to a float for carrying out the contact force. Optional. Can be NULL.

pMinPress [out] A pointer to a float for carrying out the minimum pressure. Optional. Can be NULL.

pMaxPress [out] A pointer to a float for carrying out the maximum pressure. Optional. Can be NULL.

eImageType [in] The type of image file specified by the client. The supported image types are:

BMP: Bitmap JPG: Jpeg PCX: Pcx TGA: Targa TIF: Tiff

c_SizeASCIIFileName [in] The size of the passed in buffer pASCIIFileName for getting the ACSII data file name.

pASCIIFileName [out] A pointer to a string buffer for carrying out the ACSII data file name.

Note: Only the real- t ime and movie windows can send back the ASCII data f i le. All other windows do not support ACSII data at this t ime. The types of the opening windows are def ined in the

funct ion GetOpenedWindowNames(). In the text f i le, each pixel data is separated by a comma (','), and each line is separated by a two character-string "\r\n".

6. About the Sample Client Program 6.1 FsxUser

FsxUser is a stand-alone example of a client-generated software. It can send a request to ask the associated server to send over the real-time frame data. Once the request runs successfully on the associated server, the frame data is then continuously sent over to the client, frame by frame, when it is available in server. The client may then use the frame data at will; in this example, the data is displayed on the screen with text or image format.

As shown on Figure 3, Menu Action is the placeholder for examples of using the API2 functionalities. These menus are explained item by item below.

Show Real-time Data Text

Retrieves a list of all of the opening real time windows on the running server. After the user selects one from the list, the client sends over its callback address used by the server. The real time data from the selected window will be sent directly to the client window through the client's callback address (or pointer). If there is only one real-time window open on the server, there is no window selection step and the real-time data is sent from the open real-time window. This client prints the received data on its own screen.


Show Real-time Image

Gets a list of the current selected real-time window on the running server. The client sends its callback address to be used by the server. The real-time data will be sent directly to the client window through the client’s callback address (or pointer). The client prints the received data on its own screen.

Stop Data Transfer

Asks the server to stop sending data while keeping the callback address of the client. Selecting the previous menu item will resume the data transfer.

Deactivate Callback

Asks the server to stop sending data and removes the memory of its callback address. At the same time, the client removes the real-time name of the server from its own memory.

Get Units

Gets the current real-time units of length and pressure from server.

Get Pixel Size

Gets the current real-time pixel size from server.

Get Saved File Names

Asks the server to create a text file containing the data of a snapshot of the realtime window and an image file with JPEG

Note: When the server changes the map or closes the real-t ime window which is transferring the data, the real-t ime data transfer is terminated as i f the Deact ivate

Callback menu is selected.

6.2 TekUser DLL

The usage of DLL is convenient when the customer is using commercial software to communicate with the Tekscan software (server), because most of the commercial software is not allowed to modify its source code to communicate directly with Tekscan software by this API. Here, a DLL will do the job of communicating with the server and transferring the obtained frame data from the server to the client machine, using the DLL.

The sample of TekUser DLL contains two exported routines:

1. GetFrameData()

2. GetCalFrameData().

The prototypes of GetFrameData() and GetCalFrameData() are as follows:

BOOL GetFrameData(int* pRow, int* pCol, BYTE** ppData, BOOL bEquil)

The caller should provide the address of row and column number, and the address of the byte array buffer to bring out the copied frame data.


• Arguments:

• pRow [out] A pointer to an integer for row size to be brought out. Must not be null.

• pCol [out] A pointer to an integer for column size to be brought out. Must not be null.

• ppData [out] A pointer to a pointer to a byte array. During this call, the DLL will assign the address of a byte array to the passed in pointer.

• bEquil [in] Flag specifies whether the client wants the equilibration or not. If no equilibration has applied on the server software, the copied data is unequilibrated.

BOOL GetCalFrameData(int* pRow, int* pCol, float** ppfData, BOOL bEquil)

The caller should provide the address of row and column number, and the address of the float array to bring out the copied calibrated frame data.

• Arguments:

• pRow [out] A pointer to an integer for row size to be brought out. Must not be null.

• pCol [out] A pointer to an integer for column size to be brought out. Must not be null.

• ppfData [out] A pointer to a pointer to a float array. During this call, the DLL will assign the address of a float array to the passed in pointer.

• bEquil [in] Flag specifies whether the client wants the equilibration or not. If no equilibration has applied on the server software, the copied data is unequilibrated.

An example of DLL by using C language is as follows:

typedef BOOL (GETRTDATA) (int*, int*, BYTE**, BOOL) ; GETRTDATA* pFunction;

//Load the DLL and get the address of the routine HINSTANCE hInst = ::LoadLibrary (‘e:\\dev\\win\\TekUser\\Debug\\TekUser.dll”); pFunction = (GETRTDATA*)::GetProcAddress((HMODULE))hInst, “GetFrameData”) ;

//prepare the passed in/out data int iRow, ICol; BYTE *pData = NULL;

//call the DLL routine. BOOL bStat = (*pFunction) (&iRow, &iCol, &pData, TRUE) ; CString strTestMessage;


//Display the acquired data strTestMessage.Format (“The received row number is %d, column is %d, the first pixel is %d; the third pixel is %d\n”, iRow, iCol, pData [2], pData[iCol]) ; AfxMessageBox (strTestMessage);

When loading this dll into a commercial software such as LabView, the user should consult the manual and follow it’s library function calling procedure.

Note: For start ing, run the server sof tware f irst , than the client sof tware. When closing, close the client f irst , then the server sof tware.


GLOSSARY

# 2-D Contours View: The 2-D Contours view displays the recording as a two-dimensional, contoured image. The sharp

corners of the sensor output are smoothed, making the pressure boundaries easier to discern.

2-D View: The 2-D view displays the recording in two-dimensional form with the color of each sensel location representing the pressure sensed at that point. This display looks the closest to the actual raw output of the sensor, and individual sensels can be identified. 2-D is the default view.

3-D Contours View: The 3-D Contour view displays the recording as a three-dimensional image, in which higher pressures are shown as solid peaks. This display can often provide a view of complex data that is easier to comprehend than the 3-D Wireframe image.

3-D Reverse: The 3-D Reverse view displays the recording as a three-dimensional image, in which higher pressures are shown as inverse peaks. The 3-D Reverse image is simply an inverted, or reversed, 3-D Contour image. 3-D Reverse is especially useful for viewing the exact footprint of the applied force.

3-D Wireframe View: The 3-D Wireframe view displays the recording as a three-dimensional image, in which higher pressures are shown as peaks. The relative peaks provide visual insight into the gradients within each color band. 'Wireframe' means that the image is not a solid image, and the image is represented by a series of interconnected lines. This display can often provide a better view of complex 3-D data than the 3-D Contour and Reverse views.

A About TireScan: displays the "About " dialog box, which gives basic information about the Tekscan software.

Acquisition Parameters: This Option menu item pops up the 'Data Acquisition Parameters' dialog box, which allows you to select the number of frames, duration, frequency and period of your recordings. This dialog box also enables you to add a 'Noise Threshold', and includes your 'Triggering' options. Before you take a recording, you should set the recording parameters to values appropriate for your patient session and your computer system capacity (memory). When setting the movie recording (data acquisition) parameters, you will want to set the frequency and duration based upon the period of time of interest and the rate at which pressures change in your tests.

Add Blob: The Add Blob feature enables you to study a group of loaded sensels separately from the rest of the active window. While a Polygon will allow you to study an irregularly shaped area, the Blob will allow you to study only the loaded sensels in a particular area.

Add Box: Add Box allows you to place a box in the active Movie or Real-time window. The data inside that box can then be displayed, graphed (movies only), copied, printed and analyzed separately from the rest of the window’s pressure data. When ‘Add Box’ is selected, a box symbol is added to the cursor, and a box may then be placed by clicking the cursor at the desired point in a Movie or Real-time window. You can also add a box by pressing the <CTRL> key and clicking the cursor in an open window, or by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over an ‘active’ window, and selecting ‘Add Box’.

Add Line: Add Line allows you to place a line in the active Movie or Real-time window, which can be used to measure the distance or pressure difference between two points on the sensor. When ‘Add Line’ is selected, a line symbol is added to the cursor, and a line may then be placed by clicking the cursor at the desired point in a Movie or Real-time window. You can also add a line by pressing the <SHIFT> key and clicking the cursor in an open window, or by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over an active window, and selecting ‘Add Line’.


Add Polygon: Add Polygons will add points to create irregular shapes within your movie. In order to create your shape, select the Add Polygons command from the menu or Toolbar, and left-click in your movie to add the first point (also called a ‘node’). Click on a second location to create the second point in your shape. A line will be drawn from point to point. Continue doing this to add as many sides to the shape as you like. The final step is to close the shape by clicking on the starting point/node. The shape automatically closes, and measurements are calculated for the new polygon.

Analysis Menu: The Analysis menu option provides all of the tools necessary to analyze the pressure data displayed in the Movie and Real-time windows.

API 2: Tekscan software with the API2 option enabled, will be able to export its real-time data/image, saved snapshot image file names and other pressure related data to the client software written by the User.

Append: Append allows you to record additional frames of data at the end of an existing movie. This option is only available when a Movie window (recording) is open, and will be unavailable (grayed out) if a Real-time window cannot be opened. When you select Append, the Select Sensor dialog box will be opened, and you must select which handle you would like to use to record the appended data. Once you select a handle, and click <OK>, a Real-time window is opened (the title bar will say "Append to ...").

Arrange Icons: Arrange Icons arranges the icons for minimized windows at the bottom of the Main Window. The names of the currently open Real-time, Movie, and Graph windows are listed beneath the Arrange Icons option. A check mark is displayed next to the name of the active window.

ASR (Auto-Sequential Recording): This dialog box allows you to set your ASR (Automatic Sequential Recording) options. When ASR is in effect, the software automatically saves and closes the current movie, opens a new Real-time window, and begins a new recording. This will continue until the movie count is reached. You can stop the ASR function at any point by selecting the Stop button. If triggering is in effect, each movie will be triggered separately.

Averaging: Displays the image with each cell’s pressure value modified to reflect the value of its neighbors. It does include neighboring cells that have zero load. This results in a smoother image, with an increase in total loading area since certain cells with a previous zero value now have a value. When Averaging is in effect, it has a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu, and its Tool bar icon is depressed.

B Background White: Background White changes the background areas (where no pressure is sensed) of the active

Movie, Real-time, or Graph window from white to black. Changing the background color to black is useful when viewing lighter colors in the display.

C Calibrated Legend: A calibrated legend can be opened if the corresponding Movie or Real-time window has been

calibrated; otherwise, only a raw legend may be opened. A Calibrated Legend will report the units in a specified measurement, such as PSI. If it is a Raw legend, no pressure units will be associated with each range, and the default upper limit will be 255. All calibrated movies that are open simultaneously will be controlled by one calibrated legend. Likewise, all uncalibrated (raw) movies are controlled by one raw legend. <see also "Pressure Legend" and "Raw Legend">

Calibration (Tools Menu): Calibration opens the "Calibration" dialog box, which enables you to calibrate the sensor, uncalibrate the sensor, and load andsave calibration files. You can also access the calibration options by clicking on the "Calibration" tab in the "Settings" dialog box. Once a calibration is completed, it can be saved as a file by clicking on the Save button. This file can later be loaded into another window by clicking on the Load button.


Cascade: Cascade arranges multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion. Use this feature if your application area is becoming cluttered with too many windows.

Close: Close closes the currently active Movie or Real-time window.

Close All: Close All closes all open Movie, Real-time, and Graph windows (you will be prompted to save them if they have been changed).

COF (Center of Force): The COF shows the center of all of the forces on the sensor, as displayed in the Real-time or Movie window. This feature is used to show how the pressures are balanced on the sensor. The center point is represented on the screen by the same red and white icon that represents COF on the Tool bar. As an optional feature, you can also view the COF for each separate box in the Movie or Real-time window. In this case, each COF marker will be the same color as its corresponding box. You can enable or disable these COF features in the ‘Properties’ dialog box (Analysis pull-down menu).

COF (Center of Force) Trajectory: This displays the movement of the Center of Force for the duration of a recorded movie. The movement of the COF can be tracked by playing a movie one frame at a time, with COF Trajectory selected. The trajectory is represented on the screen by a red and white line that trails the COF marker.

Comments: Comments (Ctrl+M) opens a dialog box that allows you to view, add, and edit the comments associated with the active Movie or Real-time window. The ‘Comments’ dialog box also displays the information from the Patient Record (i.e. Name, Patient ID, Gender, Date of Birth) for easier movie identification and record keeping.

Contents (Help Menu): Contents displays the "Table of Contents" for the Help information.

Coordinates: The Coordinates command found under the View menu will place the X and Y coordinates along the top and left edges of the movie window. This can be used as a ruler to locate specific places within the movie or locate specific areas of pressure. The coordinates feature is a visual aid to help you map the sensor areas.

Copy: Copy (Ctrl+C) is a powerful tool that allows you to compare movie frames, create reports or documents using actual color movie frames, and analyze pressure data in a spreadsheet or word processing program. This command saves the currently active Real-time window, Movie frame, or Graph to the Windows clipboard as both an image and as a text array of the actual pressure values. This pressure data can then be pasted into other Windows applications as either a graphic (bitmap) or as text by selecting Edit -> Paste Special.

Cut Frames: Cut Frames opens the ‘Cut Frames’ dialog box, which enables you to discard unwanted frames from a recording using a number of methods. This option is helpful for removing nonessential pressure data from movies, and also for making large movie files more manageable. The three options in the ‘Cut Method’ pull-down field are ‘Cut Frames’,‘Keep Frames’, and ‘Filtered’. ‘Cut Frames’ allows you to discard specific frames, ‘Keep Frames’ allows you to keep specific frames, and ‘Filtered’ allows you to discardframes whose total applied force is less than a specified minimum value.

D Data Acquisition Parameters: <see "Acquisition Parameters">

Duration: the length of time (seconds) that a recording will take to complete (the first frame is recorded at time=0). Duration is related to 2 other data acquisition parameters in the following way: "(Frequency * Duration) + 1 = Frames to Record" <see also "Frequency"; "Frames to Record"; "Acquisition Parameters">

E Edit Menu: The Edit Menu contains commands that pertain to the File you are currently working on within the software

application.


Edit Mode: Edit Mode displays the ‘Edit’ dialog box, which enables you to modify a specific area of the pressure data within a Movie or Real-time window. Edit Mode allows you to place an edit box or edit cell in the active window, and then modify the sensels within this box. An edit box or cell can be used to remove data from one or more sensels, or to average sensel reading(s) with those of its neighbors, in either a Movie or a Real-time window.

Equilibration: Equilibration opens the ‘Equilibration’ dialog box, which enables you to equilibrate a sensor, unequilibrate a sensor, and to save or load equilibration data as a file. Once an equilibration has been performed, a graphic representation of the pressures in the Real-time window (in grayscale) is displayed in the dialog box. This is intended to show the relative high and low spots of the sensor, and the levels of compensation necessary to ensure uniform results. Refer to the ‘Equilibration and Calibration’ section for more specific information on each menu item.

Exit: Exit closes the software application.

F File Menu: The File menu drops down a list of commands from the Main Menu. These commands pertain to working

with Movie Files, as well as Printing functions and application-wide commands such as Save and Close.

First Frame: First Frame positions the recording at the beginning (Frame 1).

Fit in Window: Setting in the "Zoom To" dialog box, which is selected through the "View" menu. This allows the entire image to be visible in the window.

Fixed Area Averaging: This option displays each cell's pressure value modified to reflect the value of its neighbors. It does not include neighboring cells that have a zero load value. The result is a smoother image. When Fixed Area Averaging is in effect, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu, and its Tool bar icon will be depressed. Refer to the ‘Analyzing Pressure Data’ section for more detailed information.

Frames to Record: the total number of frames to be recorded

Frequency: the number of frames that will be recorded each second (frames/second). Frequency is also related to 2 other data acquisition parameters in the following way: "(Frequency * Duration) + 1 = Frames to Record" <see also "Duration"; "Frames to Record"; "Acquisition Parameters">

G Graph Window: The Graph Window displays a graph of the pressure data from one or more Movie windows. A Graph

window is opened when an object (panes or a box) is placed in a Movie window. A separate color-coded graph trace is displayed for each object in the corresponding graph.

Grayscale Printing: The software can allow you to print the color screen display as a grayscale image. When a grayscale printer is installed, and selected as the default printer (in the Print Setup or Print options in the File menu), the image will be printed in grayscale.

Grid Adjustment: Box placement is affected by the Grid Adjustment. If the Grid Adjustment box is selected (checked) in the Objects dialog box, all four sides of each box will be aligned with the edges of sensor rows and columns. Each side of the box will be moved to the nearest row or column edge, even if this changes the box's size. If this option is not selected, the boxes may be positioned anywhere inside the window. If a box is already in place, and Grid Adjustment is checked, the box will move to the nearest sensor row and column edge. Pane edges are always aligned with sensor rows and columns, and the Grid Adjustment option does not affect their placement.

H


Hardware Information: Hardware Information displays a dialog box that shows which Tekscan hardware is attached to the system and how it is configured. This dialog box tells you about the connection between the hardware and the computer.

Help Menu: This menu contains information about Tekscan, as well as important information on how to use your software/hardware system.

I Installation: This section presents instructions for hardware and software installation, and also provides the system

requirements necessary to support the pressure measurement system.

Interface Board (SR-2): The Interface Board is a data acquisition card that uses a 16-bit ISA expansion slot of your computer. Refer to the manual supplied with your computer for any specific details on installing a board in your computer's expansion slot.

Interpolation: Interpolation further divides the displayed sensel into more pixels. Interpolated displays are available for 2-D sensel display. 3x3 interpolation divides each sensel into 9 sub-sensels and displays them with the center sub-sensel displaying the original cell value and surrounding 8 sub-sensels using an interpolation algorithm to calculate the pressure gradient between sensels. 5x5 interpolation uses the same method to divide each sensel into 25 sub-sensels. The original single sensel display option (no interpolation) is still available.

L Last Frame: Last Frame positions the recording at the end (final frame).

Legend: The Legend shows the pressure range that corresponds to each of the 13 possible colors in any open Movie or Real-time window. The Options ->Set Legend menu item can be used to place a Raw or Calibrated Legend in the Main Window.

Load Calibration File: This option allows you to use the calibration data from a previously-saved file for your current Movie or Real-time window. When this item is selected, an Open dialog box appears, and you can specify the file name and destination (path) of the calibration file you want to load. Calibration data from calibration files (with the extension *.cal) or from I-Scan movies (with the extension *.fsx) may be loaded.

Load Edit File: Load Edit File enables you to load an existing edit file, with the extension *.fed, into the currently active Movie or Real-time window. An edit file is simply the saved edit boxes and/or cells from a previously-edited window. When the edit file is loaded, the edit boxes/cells are placed at the same coordinates at which they were saved, with the same properties, and the ‘Edit’ dialog box is opened.

Load Equilibration File: This option allows you to use the equilibration data from a previously saved file for your current Real-time window. When this item is selected, an Open dialog box appears, and you can specify the file name and destination (path) of the equilibration file you want to load. You can also access this option by clicking on the Load Eq. File button in the Equilibration dialog box. Only I-Scanâ equilibration files (with the extension *.equ) may be loaded.

Load Object File: Load Object File allows you to load previously-saved objects (panes, boxes, and lines) into the current Movie or Real-time window. Load Object File can also be accessed by clicking the ‘Load Object File’ button in the ‘Objects’ dialog box. When Load Object File is selected, an ‘Open’ dialog box is displayed, and ‘object files’ (with the extension *.fbx only) can be opened. When an object file is loaded into the current window, the objects will be placed at their saved coordinates (location). If the current window is not the same size as the original window, the software will still attempt to place the objects at the correct coordinates.

Lock Objects: Lock Objects will make all the objects within your movie immovable. This is useful to keep the objects held down in case you are prone to accidentally moving them while you work within the movie.


M Main Menu: The Main Menu (or Menu Bar) provides the pull-down menus used to control the application. It is located

between the Title Bar (at the top of the application) and the Toolbar, running lengthwise along the main application screen. The most frequently used items in the Main Menu also have an icon on the Tool Bar

Main Status Bar: The Main Status Bar provides information about what is happening on your screen at any given moment. When the cursor is over a Tool Bar icon, the left side of the status bar will give a description of that icon; otherwise, it will say Ready. When the cursor is over a Real-time or Movie window, the right side of the status bar will give the cursor position (Row, Col:), and the applied load (Load) on the sensor at that point. Note that the cursor position corresponds to the actual row and column on the sensor (the origin, or zero point, is the top right corner of the window). You will see pressures in finer detail here in comparison to the ranges of pressure shown by the color bands on the display. The load shown may be affected by the display mode; for instance, it will be an averaged value if AVERAGING is selected. It may also be affected by the Legend's lower limit.

Max Area Frame: Max Area Frame advances the current movie to the frame that has the largest contact area. The actual contact area is displayed in the center of the Movie Status Bar. Note that only pressures above the legend's lower limit (threshold) are displayed, and accounted for in the contact area. Max Area Frame is not available in Real-time mode.

Measurement Units: Measurement Units displays the ‘Units of Measure’ dialog box, which allows you to choose the units that will be displayed for length, force, and pressure, the number of decimal places that will be displayed for force and pressure, and the increment by which the upper and lower legend limits can be scrolled. The default units are inches for Units of Length, pounds for Force, and PSI (pounds per square inch) for Pressure. The default number of decimal places depends on the units that are selected, and the default ‘Legend Scroll’ value is 1. The units and decimal place settings are applied to all Movie and Real-time windows,and Graphs, regardless of which view is currently active. Once you change these settings, the software will remember them when you start a new patient session or close the application.

Menu Bar: The Menu Bar provides the pull-down menus used to control the Research Foot 5.20 program. Each Menu Bar option is described in detail in the 'Main Menu' section. When no Movie or Real-time windows are open, the Menu Bar contains only the File, Options, and Help menus. When a window is open, the other menus become available. When a Menu Bar item is unavailable, it will be grayed out.

Movie (Frame) Calibration: The I-Scan system enables you to perform two different types of calibration, linear and 2-point power law, on an existing Movie window. Refer to the Calibration section for instructions on how to calibrate a Real-time window. To perform a movie (frame) calibration, you enter the total force applied to the sensor in a specific frame of the movie, in the Movie Calibration Point dialog box. The I-Scan software then performs a linear interpolation between zero load and this known calibration load. To perform a 2-point power law calibration, you enter the total force applied for a different frame of the movie. The software then performs a power law interpolation based on zero load and the two known calibration loads, using the equation y=ax^b.

Movie Averaging: Movie Averaging opens the Select Averaging Range dialog box, which allows you to display the averaged pressure value of each cell for the entire recording, or for a selected range of frames, in one composite frame. You can also choose to average the movie into multiple composite frames.

Movie Contact Averaging: Movie Contact Averaging opens the Select Averaging Range dialog box, which allows you to display the averaged pressure value of each cell for the entire recording, or for a selected range of frames, in one composite frame. You can also choose to average the movie into multiple composite frames. This menu item is very similar to the Movie Averaging option, except that it calculates the cell's average pressure value in a slightly different manner. The difference between these two types of movie averaging is that cells with zero load are disregarded in this option, whereas they are factored into the formula with a zero value in the Movie Averaging option.


Movie Menu: The Movie menu items and corresponding Tool bar icons control the movie playback and recording functions. The playback menu items and icons control all open movies in unison, regardless of which movie is active.

Movie Status Bar: The Movie Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Movie Window, and displays the Frame count (or Relative Time or Absolute Date/Time), Area, and Force. The left side of the status bar displays the frame count, which is the current frame number vs. the total number in the movie. You can choose to display the Relative Time or Absolute Date/Time, in place of the Frame count, in the Set User Preferences dialog box.

Movie Window: The Movie Window displays a previously-recorded movie.

Multi-Tile Calibration: I-Scan allows you to calibrate a "virtual" or "multi-region" sensor, either as a single window or as separate tiles. You can perform both linear and 2-point power law calibrations, for a Real-time or Movie window, for this virtual sensor.

Multi-Tile Equilibration: I-Scan allows you to equilibrate a "virtual" or "multi-region" sensor, either as a single window or as separate tiles.

N New Recording: New Recording (Ctrl+N) opens a new Real-time window, in addition to any Movie or Real-time

windows that are currently open. The new Real-time window becomes the active window when it is opened. When New Recording is selected, the window size and position, display options (e.g. 3-D, COF, zoom %, rotation), and calibration and equilibration data are all recalled from the previous Real-time window.

New Session: When beginning a new session, selecting this option will close all open windows (asking the user whether to save unsaved data), open a new Real-time window, and reset all display options, as well as the sensitivity, calibration, and equilibration data. Note: If you close the application, then restart the program and open a Real-time window, the display options (e.g. 3-D, COF, zoom %, rotation) and the sensitivity setting will be recalled.

Next Frame: Next Frame (Ctrl+X) plays the recording forward one frame (or phase) each time it is clicked.

Noise Threshold: After a period of use or in the presence of EMI, a sensor may indicate noise as low level pressure. To reduce the effect of such noise on your recordings, you can set a noise threshold. Digital output values that are equal to or below this threshold are set to zero by the software, thereby filtering out unwanted low level force readings (noise).

O Objects: Objects displays the ‘Objects’ dialog box, which can be used to control each object (pane, box, and line) that

is placed in a Real-time or Movie window. Using this dialog box, objects can be added, deleted, changed, saved as an ASCII (text) data file,or saved/loaded as an ‘Object file’.

Open Linked Video: Open Linked Video will open a video and link the movie and video together. When Play is selected, movie and video will play simultaneously.

Open Movie: Open Movie (Ctrl+O) allows you to open previously recorded movies or snapshots (withthe *.fsx file extension only).

Options Menu: This menu contains commands for system settings and how the software interacts with the Hardware (Hardware Information). All the settings found under this menu affect the entire software application (Global settings) as opposed to affecting individual files (local settings).

P


Pause: Pause causes the active Movie or Real-time window to ‘freeze’, or to ignore all movie playback or recording commands. When a window is paused, the left-most pane of that window’s status bar will ‘pop out’; clicking on this pane (‘Frame Count’ or ‘Sensor OK’) will toggle Pause on and off for the window. When a movie is paused, its corresponding timeline in any graphs is also paused.

PC Interface Board (SR-2): The Interface Board is a data acquisition card that uses a 16-bit ISA expansion slot of your computer. Refer to the manual supplied with your computer for any specific details on installing a board in your computer's expansion slot.

Peak: Peak displays the maximum pressure value that each sensel reached during the recording, in one composite frame. This allows you to view, simultaneously, the highest pressures experienced by each part of the sensor during the recording. Peak is available in all 2-D and 3-D display modes. When this item is enabled, the Movie Status Bar will say 'Peak', and the movie playback options will be unavailable. If Peak is in effect while COF Trajectory is enabled, the trajectory of the COF for the entire range of frames is displayed. Peak is toggled on and off; when it is enabled, it will have a check mark beside it in the pull-down menu, its Tool bar icon will be depressed.

Period: Period - the amount of time between frames (seconds/frame). Period is related to Frequency by the following relationship: "Period = 1 / Frequency"

Play Backward: Play Backward (Ctrl+8) plays the recording in reverse, starting at the current frame (or phase). To enable‘Continuous Play’, press the <SHIFT> key, and simultaneously select Play Forward or Play Backward. The movie will play in the desired direction indefinitely, looping back to the first or last frame each time.

Play Forward: Play Forward (Ctrl+F, F5) plays the recording forward, starting at the current frame (or phase). To enable ‘Continuous Play’, press the <SHIFT> key, and simultaneously select Play Forward or Play Backward. The movie will play in the desired direction indefinitely, looping back to the first or last frame each time.

Play Speed: Play Speed sets the speed in which the movie plays. Choices are Slowest, Medium Slow, Normal, Medium Fast, and Fastest. It is usually beneficial to play the movie at a Medium Slow speed in order to analyze the movement in proper detail. Otherwise, the movie may be too fast to notice the change in pressures.

Polar Sensor: Sensors with sensels arranged in rows and columns (Cartesian coordinates) are well-suited to applications in which the load area is rectangular. In cases where the load area is circular or annular, sensors with sensels arranged in circles and radii (polar coordinates) may be used. Polar sensors have sensels with different areas as a function of the sensel radial location. The I-Scanâ software accounts for these variations by breaking the polar sensor grid into a finer Cartesian grid. The displayed image is actually an image of these virtual sensels.

Pressure Legend: The Pressure Legend shows the pressure range that corresponds to each of the 13 possible colors in any open Movie or Real-time window. The number shown on each color in the Pressure Legend is the lowest pressure value in that color's range. The values in the fields at the top and bottom of the legend are the upper and lower limits, respectively. The pressure units (or raw) are also displayed at the top of the legend. A legend can be placed in the Main Window by selecting Set Legend from the Options pull-down menu, or clicking the corresponding Tool bar icon.

Previous Frame: Previous Frame (Ctrl+V) plays the recording in reverse one frame each time it is clicked.

Print: Print (Ctrl+P, F9) allows you to print the contents of the currently active Movie or Real-time window, including comments, header information and graphs, to any of the hundreds of printers which MS Windows supports. The window will be printed exactly as it appears on the screen, and will include the options selected in "Print Setup" <see also "Print Setup">.

Print Preview: Print Preview (Ctrl+F9) shows you exactly how your printed page will appear. It is recommended that you preview all printed pages to ensure that your setup is correct. You can also view the Print Preview by clicking its icon in the Main Tool Bar.


Print Setup: Print Setup gives you a number of printing options that control what will be printed, and how this printed page will look.

Properties: Properties opens the ‘Properties’ dialog box, which controls the display attributes of all objects (panes, boxes and lines) in an active Real-time or Movie window, or the X- and Y-axis display attributes of an active graph in the Main Window. You can also open this dialog box by clicking the right mouse button with the cursor over an active window or graph, and selecting ‘Properties’.

R Raw Legend: If no calibration has been performed on the specified sensor, A Raw Legend will open. This is the default

Legend, and any sensor measurements will be recorded on a scale from 0 to 255 (255 being the upper default limit). No pressure units will be associated with each range. <See also "Pressure Legend" and "Calibrated Legend">

Real-Time Status Bar: The Real-Time Status Bar is located at the bottom of the Real-time window, and displays the sensor status (or the frame count of a recording in progress), Area, and Force. The left side of this status bar displays the sensor status; either 'Ready' or 'MISALIGNED!'. If this message is 'MISALIGNED!', remove and reinsert the sensor tab into the handle, ensuring that the sensor is right side up, and the dial on the front is in the proper position.

Real-Time Window: The Real-time window displays each sensor's color-coded pressure information as it is happening, or in real time. If no pressure is on the sensor, a blank Real-time window will appear.

Recent Files: The names of the four most recently viewed movies are displayed between Print Setup and Exit on the File menu. You may open any of these files by clicking on its name.

Record: Record (Ctrl+R, F2) is used to make a recording (movie). When Record is selected, the software begins recording frames of sensor pressure data as it appears in the current Real-time windows, using the Acquisition Parameters selected in the Options pull-down menu. You can also begin recording by pressing the <F2> key on your keyboard. If‘Triggering’ is in effect, and Record is selected, recording will not begin until the start trigger event occurs. When data is being recorded,‘(Rec)’ is added to the Real-time window title bar, and the window’s status bar displays each frame number as it is recorded. Movies created by the software application are stored as *.fsx files.

Recording: A Tekscan recording captures sensor pressure over a period of time. It is similar to a video recording, since you can rewind your recording, play it and replay it as many times as you wish. These pressure data recordings are also referred to as "movies".

Rotate: Rotate turns the entire view clockwise in 90 degrees increments from its current orientation. All 2-D and 3-D views are rotated clockwise. When a window is rotated, the zero point (which is initially in the upper left corner of each window) is also rotated. If you get confused at any point, put the cursor over a sensel and look at the coordinates displayed in the Status Bar to get the true row and column numbers.

S Save ASCII: Save ASCII allows you to save the current Movie, Real-time or Graph window data as an ASCII (text) file,

with the file name and location of your choice. Specifically, you can save frame sensel pressure data, center of force (COF) data, or an object’s graph data. The ‘Objects’ dialog box also contains a ‘Save ASCII’ button, which can be used to save graph data ASCII files.

Save Calibration File: Save Calibration File allows you to save your current calibration data (from a Movie or Real-time window) as a file for future use. When this item is selected, a "Save As" dialog box appears, and the calibration file can be saved with the specific file name and destination (path) of your choice. You can also access this


option by clicking on the Save button in the "Calibration" dialog box, or in the "Settings" dialog box("Calibration" tab). Tekscan calibration files must be saved with the extension *.cal.

Save Edit File: Save Edit File enables you to save the edit boxes and/or cells from the currently active Movie or Real-time window as an edit file, with the extension *.fed. When you select Save Edit File, a ‘Save As’ dialog box opens, and you must enter a filename and path. For a Movie window, the default file name will be the name of the movie (e.g. “SmitJ01L.fbx”). The edit box/cell information, which includes their coordinates and selected ‘Edit’ and ‘View’ options, will be saved in the file. These edit boxes/cells can then be placed into a Movie or Real-time window simply by loading the edit file.

Save Equilibration File: This option allows you to save your current equilibration data (in a Real-time window) as a file for future use. When this item is selected, a Save As dialog box appears, and the equilibration file can be saved with the specific file name and destination (path) of your choice. You can also access this option by clicking on the Save Eq. File button in the Equilibration dialog box. I-Scan equilibration files must be saved with the extension *.equ.

Save Movie: Save Movie (Ctrl+S) will save the newly-recorded Real-time window as a file, with the extension *.fsx. It will be saved in the “Movies”directory. When Save Movie is selected, the ‘Add Movie to Database’ dialog box will be displayed, and you will be asked whether or not you want to save the movie to the file management system.

Save Movie As: Save Movie As will save the current movie, with the specific file name and location of your choice. This menu item is also available when a Movie window is active, and can be used to save a movie under more than one file name. When Save Movie As is selected, the ‘Add Movie to Database’ dialog box will be displayed, and you will be asked whether or not you want to save the movie to the file management system. Tekscan movie files must have the extension *.fsx. Note that your system may limit file names to eight characters.

Save Object File: Save Object File allows you to save the objects (panes, boxes, and lines) from an active Real-time or Movie window as a file. Objects are saved exactly as they appear in the window, with the same properties and coordinates (location). This option is necessary because, when a Real-time window is saved as a movie file, the objects in the window are not saved as part of the file.

Save View as Movie: Save View as Movie allows you to save the current movie frame, or view, as a movie file (with extension *.fsx). This new movie file will consist of one frame, and will be saved exactly as it appeared when saved. Any View menu items that are in effect when Save View as Movie is selected will be retained in the saved file. Note that COF Trajectory will not be displayed by the saved view, since it only affects movies with more than one frame.

Search (Help Menu): Search allows you to query the Help file to obtain the specific information you are looking for. You enter the search parameters, which can be words or phrases, and the Help file will list all help topics that pertain to your search. You can directly click on these Help topics to open them within the main Help window.

Select Sensor: Select Sensor displays the ‘Select Sensor’ dialog box, which enables you to designate the sensor (map) and sensor handles that are currently installed on your Tekscan system. The system needs this information in order to display the data correctly in the Real-time windows. The dialog box lists the system’s ‘Available maps’ and ‘Available handles’.

Sensitivity: This dialog box enables you to select the handle sensitivity from 11 possible settings, ranging from Low-1 to Hi-4. It can be accessed by selecting Adjust Sensitivity from the Options pull-down menu, clicking the Sensitivity button in the Calibration dialog box, or by clicking on the Sensitivity tab in the Settings dialog box. The sensitivity (also referred to as adjustable gain) adjusts the data output range from the computer (0 to 255 raw) to the actual force range output from the system handle. The sensitivity should be adjusted whenever necessary to keep the Real-time display in a usable range (i.e. both the high and low pressures are visible), or if the sensor saturates at a lower pressure than desired.


Sensors: The I-Scan sensor is an ultra-thin (.004", 0.10mm) flexible printed circuit. It has up to 2288 individual pressure sensing locations, which may also be referred to as sensing elements or sensels. The sensels are arranged in rows and columns (Cartesian coordinates) on the sensor in most cases (not in Polar Sensors). The sensor acts as a variable resistor in an electrical circuit. When the sensor is unloaded, its resistance is very high; when a force is applied to the sensor, the resistance decreases. This output resistance is then converted to a digital value (raw sum) in the range of 0 to 255. Because of the nature of the pressure sensitive layer that is the heart of the I-Scan sensors, it is possible to produce sensors of varying sensitivity. Sensors with pressure ranges as low as 0 - 5 PSI (0 - 260 mmHg) and as high as 0 - 25,000 PSI (0 - 172 Mpa) have been produced. The active sensing area of the sensor is surrounded by the substrate material that contains conductive leads. These leads connect the rows and columns of the active sensing area to the terminal section or tab of the sensor. The top side of the sensor is labeled This Side UP near the terminal section. The sensor tab must be inserted into the handle with the proper orientation.

Set Legend: Set Legend enables you to place a Raw or Calibrated Pressure Legend in the Main Window. The Pressure Legend shows the pressure range that corresponds to each of the 13 possible colors in any open Movie or Real-time window, and allows you to alter the colors that are displayed in these windows.

Set User Preferences: Available from the Options drop-down menu, the User Preferences allow you to customize certain operational features of the system according to your preferences. These Preferences are Global in Nature, meaning they affect the operation of the software across the board, not only specific files.

Settings: Accessed from the Options Menu, the Settings displays the ‘Settings’ dialog box for the currently active Movie or Real-Time window. This dialog box allows you to view the window’s general information, comments, and calibration data, all in one place.

Snapshot: Snapshot (Ctrl+A, F3) is used to make a single-frame recording (movie). When Snapshot is selected, the software records a single frame of sensor pressure data as it appears in the current Real-time windows. You can also take a snapshot by pressing the <F3> key on your keyboard. The only Acquisition Parameters that apply to a Snapshot are ‘Triggering’ and ‘Noise Threshold’. When data is being recorded, the word ‘(Rec)’ is added to the Real-time window title bar. Movies created by the software application are stored as*.fsx files.

Status Bar: The Main Status Bar provides information about what is happening on your screen at any given moment, and is located at the bottom of the application window. When the cursor is over a Tool Bar icon, the left side of the status bar will give a description of that icon; otherwise, it will say 'Ready'. When the cursor is over a Real-time or Movie window, the right side of the Main Status Bar will give the cursor position ('Row, Col:'), and the pressure ('Load') on the sensor at that point. Note that the cursor position corresponds to the actual row and column on the sensor (the origin, or zero point, is the top left corner of the window).

Status Bar (View Menu): Status Bar is used to display or hide the Main, Movie, and Real-time Status Bars. These status bars can be toggled on and off by clicking this menu item. If a Graph is the active window, this menu item affects the Main Status Bar. If a Movie window is active, this menu item affects the Movie Status Bar. If a Real-time window is active, this menu item affects the Real-time Status Bar.

Stop (Movie): Stop (Ctrl+T, F4) stops either playback or recording. If a recording is in progress, Stop will cause the software to stop recording the active Real-time window, even if the selected number of movie frames have not yet been recorded.

T Technical Support (Help Menu): Technical Support provides information on how to contact Tekscan for technical

assistance.

Tile (Vertically or Horizontally): Tile (Vertically or Horizontally) arranges multiple opened windows in an overlapped fashion, either vertically (side by side) or horizontally (top to bottom). Useful for arranging many windows on your screen in an orderly fashion.


Title Bar: Each window (Main, Real-time, Movie, and Graph) has a title bar along the top, which displays the name (title) of that window (e.g. Real-time 1 or Movie1.fsx). If that window is paused, (Paused) is added to the title. If a recording is in progress, (Rec) is added to the title. Each title bar has the usual MS Windows control button at the left end and minimize, maximize and close buttons at the right end. Only one window may be active at one time; the active window's title bar will be colored, while the deactivated windows' title bars will be gray. Note: You can also move dialog boxes by dragging their title bars.

Toolbar: The Toolbar contains the most common Research Foot 5.20 functions. It is located at the top of the main application window, directly below the main Menu Bar. The Tool Bar provides the same options as the Menu Bar, but with icons replacing pull-down menus. Each icon on the Tool Bar has a corresponding pull-down item in the Menu Bar; however, only the most frequently used items on the Menu Bar have an icon on the Tool Bar.

Toolbar (View Menu): oolbar is used to display or hide the Main Tool Bar. The Tool bar can be toggled on and off by clicking this menu item.

Tools Menu: The Tools menu items control the sensor Equilibration and Calibration functions, or else the Calibration functions only if using Clinical Foot 5.20. The only Tools menu item that has a corresponding Tool bar icon is the Calibration item.

U Un-Calibrate: This option simply removes the sensor's calibration data. When this menu item is selected, a dialog box

appears, giving the option of canceling the UnCalibrate operation. UnCalibrate cannot be used to uncalibrate a Movie window, and will only be available when a calibrated Real-time window is open. If you want to recalibrate the sensor during the same testing session, you may either use UnCalibrate to reset the calibration of the current window, or select File -> New Session to get a new Real-time window.

Un-Equilibrate: This option discards the current Real-time window's equilibration data. When this item is selected, a dialog box appears, giving the option of canceling the UnEquilibrate operation. This option may be used if you make a mistake in performing your initial equilibration, or if you want to perform another equilibration without exiting the I-Scan program.

Units: This dialog box allows you to choose the units that will be displayed for length, force, and pressure, and the number of decimal places that will be displayed for force and pressure. The defaults units are inches for Units of Length, pounds for Force, and PSI for Pressure. The default number of decimal places depends on the the units that are selected. The units and decimal place settings are applied to all Movie and Real-time windows, and Graphs, regardless of which view is currently active. Once you change these settings, the software will remember them when you start a new session or close the application.

V Video Capture and Playback: Synchronizing a (video) image of the subject's movements with the Tekscan pressure

data recording can clarify what is causing the pressure patterns one sees when reviewing and analyzing the Tekscan pressure data. The Video Capture and Playback Package enables you to view the images seen by your video camera on your PC screen and record a video (avi file) of your test at the same time you record a pressure movie (fsx file) using the Tekscan Pressure Measurement System and sensor. In addition to enabling you to view and record these two types of files on your PC, this software package allows you to synchronize, link, review and then analyze the two files (avi and fsx) within the Tekscan software. The benefit of the Video Capture and Playback Package is that it eliminates the need for you to purchase a third party software package for video capture and videotape conversion. Thus it provides you with a convenient way to view video directly onto your PC and save the live video feed (or real-time video) directly to the computer's hard drive - instead of having to record the video onto a tape and then convert it to a digital video format that the computer can use as a second step. Since both the recorded Tekscan pressure movie and the captured video are saved on the computer hard drive, they are both ready to be played back immediately, without the delay of having to


download and convert the videotape from the video camera after making a recording. This is both time saving and convenient.

View Menu: The View menu items and corresponding Tool bar icons control the primary sensor display functions for the Movie or Real-time windows. When one of the 2-D or 3-D items is enabled, it will have a dot beside it in the pull-down menu, and its Tool bar icon will be depressed. Note that the sensor data does not change when changing modes, only the appearance of the display is altered.

W Window Menu: The Window Menu contains commands that control the way Real-Time and Movie windows are viewed

on your screen, and list all the currently open windows at the bottom of the menu. Clicking on these list items will make the corresponding window active.

Z Zoom To. . .: Zoom To. . . allows you to resize the display inside the active Movie or Real-time window. Percentages

refer to the actual size of the sensor. Zoom percentages are available up to 400%, and any size up to this value can be entered in the ‘Custom Fit’ area. The default size (when 2-D or 2-D Contours is in effect) is Fit in Window. Zoom To only applies to the active window, and is not affected by the <CTRL> key.

Documents

TireScan Manual